Notifier AFP-200 Installation Manual

Analog Fire Panel

AFP-200

Installation Manual

Document 15511

10/14/2002 Rev:

15511:H2 ECN 02-436

H2

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Fire Alarm System Limitations

While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!

An automatic fire alarm system

—typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire.

Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.

The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire

Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System

Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all installing dealers. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as

35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons:

Smoke detectors

may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building.

A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire.

Particles of combustion or “smoke”

from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because:

• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow.

• Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located.

• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets.

• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector.

The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm.

Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire.

Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).

Heat detectors

do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time.

For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life.

IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors

must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crippling its ability to report a fire.

Audible warning devices

such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.

Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medication. Please note that:

• Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy.

• Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals.

• In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss.

A fire alarm system

will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly.

Equipment used in the system

may not be technically compatible with the control. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel.

Telephone lines

needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are recommended.

The most common cause

of fire alarm malfunction is inadequate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At a minimum, the requirements of Chapter 7 of NFPA

72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept.

Precau-L-4-2002.fm

2


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Installation Precautions

Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:

WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel.

Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.

CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software

Changes.

To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.

All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested.

In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.

This system

meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49°

C/32-120° F and at a relative humidity of 85% RH - 93% per

ULC - (non-condensing) at 30° C/86° F. However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27° C/60-80° F.

Verify that wire sizes are adequate

for all initiating and indicating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a

10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage.

Like all solid state electronic devices,

this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning-induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.

Disconnect AC power and batteries

prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.

Remove all electronic assemblies

prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, and printed circuit board location.

Do not tighten screw terminals

more than 9 in-lbs.

Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.

Though designed to last many years,

system components can fail at any time. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.

Follow the instructions

in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment.

FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation by authorized personnel.

FCC Warning

WARNING:

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC

Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Canadian Requirements

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian

Department of Communications.

Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le

Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.

Precau-L-4-2002.fm

Acclimate Plus™

,

HARSH™

,

NOTI•FIRE•NET™

,

ONYX™

, and

VeriFire™

are trademarks, and

FlashScan

® and

VIEW

® are registered trademarks of

NOTIFIER.

NION™

and

UniNet™

are trademarks of NIS.

NIS™

and

Notifier Integrated Systems™

are trademarks and

NOTIFIER®

is a registered trademark of Fire•Lite Alarms, Inc.

Echelon

® is a registered trademark and

LonWorks™

is a trademark of Echelon Corporation.

ARCNET®

is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation.

Microsoft®

and

Windows®

are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

LEXAN®

is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


3

About This Manual.................................................................................................. 10

Section 1 System Overview .................................................................................. 14

1.1 General Description.............................................................................................................................. 14

1.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 14

1.3 Components........................................................................................................................................... 15

1.3.1 Membrane Switch Panel ..................................................................................................................................15

1.3.2 Panel Sounder ..................................................................................................................................................16

1.3.3 Output Circuits (TB2) ......................................................................................................................................16

1.3.4 Relays (TB3) ....................................................................................................................................................16

1.4 Main Assemblies ................................................................................................................................... 17

1.4.1 CPU Board .......................................................................................................................................................17

1.4.2 Cabinet .............................................................................................................................................................18

1.4.3 LCD Display ....................................................................................................................................................18

1.4.4 Membrane Switch Panel ..................................................................................................................................18

1.4.5 Transformer Assembly ....................................................................................................................................18

1.4.6 Batteries ...........................................................................................................................................................18

1.5 Optional Devices & Option Modules .................................................................................................. 19

1.5.1 Digital Communicator .....................................................................................................................................19

1.5.2 UDACT ............................................................................................................................................................19

1.5.3 Network Interface Board - NIB-96 ..................................................................................................................19

1.5.4 Field Charger/Power Supply - FCPS-24 ..........................................................................................................20

1.5.5 Battery Charger - CHG-120 .............................................................................................................................20

1.5.6 Liquid Crystal Display - LCD-80 ....................................................................................................................20

1.5.7 Option Module: Transmitter Module - 4XTM ................................................................................................20

1.5.8 Option Module: Relay/Transmitter Module - RTM-8 .....................................................................................20

1.5.9 Meter Module ..................................................................................................................................................20

1.5.10 Trim Ring .......................................................................................................................................................21

1.5.11 Battery Box ....................................................................................................................................................21

1.5.12 Dress Panel ....................................................................................................................................................21

1.5.13 Expansion Power Supplies (AVPS-24 and APS-6R) ....................................................................................21

1.5.14 Marine Cabinet ..............................................................................................................................................21

1.6 Intelligent Detectors.............................................................................................................................. 21

1.7 Addressable Modules............................................................................................................................ 22

1.7.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................22

1.7.2 Module Descriptions ........................................................................................................................................22

1.8 End-of-Line Devices.............................................................................................................................. 24

1.8.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................24

1.9 Annunciation Modules ......................................................................................................................... 24

1.9.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................24

1.9.2 Annunciator Control Module-8R (ACM-8R) ..................................................................................................24

1.9.3 LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules .................................................................................................................24

1.9.4 Annunciator Control System (ACS) ................................................................................................................25

1.9.5 Annunciator Fixed Modules ............................................................................................................................25

1.10 EIA-232 Peripheral Devices (TB4).................................................................................................... 26

1.10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................26

1.10.2 PRN Remote Printer ......................................................................................................................................26

1.10.3 Keltron Remote Printer (Model VS4095) ......................................................................................................26

1.10.4 CRT-2 Display Terminal ...............................................................................................................................26

1.11 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 27

1.11.1 Primary AC Power (TB7) ..............................................................................................................................27

1.11.2 Battery (lead-acid only) .................................................................................................................................27

1.11.3 Signaling Line Circuit (TB6) .........................................................................................................................27

1.11.4 Notification Appliance and Releasing Circuits (TB2) ...................................................................................27

1.11.5 Relays (TB3) ..................................................................................................................................................28

1.11.6 24 VDC Power (TB1) ....................................................................................................................................28

1.12 Cabinet Dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 28

1.12.1 Surface Mount with a BB-17 Battery Box .....................................................................................................28

4


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

1.12.2 Semi-flush Mount ..........................................................................................................................................29

Section 2 Installation ............................................................................................. 30

2.1 Preparing for Installation..................................................................................................................... 30

2.1.1 Unpacking the System .....................................................................................................................................30

2.1.2 Installation Notes .............................................................................................................................................30

2.1.3 Standards and Codes ........................................................................................................................................30

2.2 Installation Checklist............................................................................................................................ 31

2.3 Backbox Mounting................................................................................................................................ 32

2.4 AC and DC Power Connections .......................................................................................................... 33

2.4.1 AC Power Connections (TB7) .........................................................................................................................33

2.4.2 Battery Power Connection (J3) ........................................................................................................................34

2.4.3 Expansion Power Supplies – AVPS-24 or APS-6R (Optional) .......................................................................34

2.5 DC Output Power Connections (TB1) ................................................................................................ 35

2.6 Output Circuits (TB2) .......................................................................................................................... 35

2.6.1 Notification Appliance Circuits .......................................................................................................................35

2.7 Standard Relays (TB3) ......................................................................................................................... 36

2.8 EIA-232 Devices – Remote Printers and CRTs (TB4) ....................................................................... 37

2.8.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................37

2.8.2 Printer Configuration .......................................................................................................................................37

2.8.3 Installation .......................................................................................................................................................37

2.8.4 Keltron Printer .................................................................................................................................................38

2.8.5 CRT Connections .............................................................................................................................................39

2.9 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) ............................................................................................... 41

2.9.1 Overview of SLC Wiring .................................................................................................................................41

2.9.2 SLC Devices ....................................................................................................................................................42

2.9.3 Control Panel Capacity ....................................................................................................................................42

2.9.4 SLC Performance .............................................................................................................................................43

2.9.5 SLC Shield Termination ..................................................................................................................................43

2.9.6 Setting an SLC Address for a Module .............................................................................................................44

2.9.7 Wire Requirements for a Two-wire SLC .........................................................................................................45

2.9.8 Wire Requirements for a Four-wire SLC ........................................................................................................46

2.9.9 Wiring an Isolator Module (ISO-X) ................................................................................................................49

2.9.10 Wiring an IDC with Monitor Modules ..........................................................................................................50

2.9.11 Wiring a Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) or Control Circuit ..............................................................56

2.9.12 SLC Wiring with Control Modules ...............................................................................................................57

2.9.13 SLC Wiring with an Intelligent Detector .......................................................................................................59

2.9.14 SLC Wiring with an NBG-12LX Addressable Manual Pull Station .............................................................60

2.10 Option Module Installation................................................................................................................ 61

2.10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................61

2.10.2 Installing a 4XTM Module ............................................................................................................................62

2.10.3 Installing an RTM-8 Module .........................................................................................................................63

Section 3 Programming......................................................................................... 65

3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 65

3.1.1 Programming Methods ....................................................................................................................................65

3.1.2 In This Section .................................................................................................................................................65

3.2 Getting Started ...................................................................................................................................... 66

3.2.1 How to Access Programming Options .............................................................................................................66

3.2.2 Programming Passwords ..................................................................................................................................66

3.2.3 How to Use the Programming Keypad ...........................................................................................................67

3.2.4 Programming Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................68

3.2.5 Upload and Download .....................................................................................................................................68

3.2.6 Key Programming Terms .................................................................................................................................68

3.2.7 How to Avoid Programming Errors .................................................................................................................69

3.3 Program Change Options..................................................................................................................... 70

3.3.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................70

3.4 How to Enter Program Change ........................................................................................................... 71

3.4.1 Program Change Map ......................................................................................................................................72

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


5

3.4.2 How to Clear a Program from Memory (0=clr) ..............................................................................................73

3.4.3 How to Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=auto) ...........................................................................................73

3.4.4 How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point) ..........................................................................................................78

3.4.5 How to Change a Programming Password (3=passwd) ...................................................................................85

3.4.6 How to Change a System Message (4=message) ............................................................................................86

3.4.7 How to Change a Zone Label (5=zones) .........................................................................................................86

3.4.8 How to Edit a Special Zone (6=spl zones) ......................................................................................................87

3.4.9 How to Edit System Functions (7=sys) ...........................................................................................................89

3.4.10 How to Check the Program (8=check) ..........................................................................................................92

3.5 Status Change Options ......................................................................................................................... 92

3.5.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................92

3.5.2 Entering Status Change ....................................................................................................................................93

3.5.3 Status Change Programming Map ...................................................................................................................94

3.5.4 How to Disable or Enable a Point (1=disable) ................................................................................................95

3.5.5 How to Set Detector Selections (2=sens/comp) ..............................................................................................96

3.5.6 How to Clear Alarm Verification Counters (3=clr ver) ...................................................................................97

3.5.7 How to Clear the History Buffer (4=clr hist) ...................................................................................................98

3.5.8 How to Set the System Time and Date (5=time) .............................................................................................98

3.5.9 How to do a Walk Test (6=walk test) ..............................................................................................................99

Section 4 Operation ............................................................................................. 101

4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 101

4.2 The Membrane Panel ......................................................................................................................... 102

4.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................102

4.2.2 How to Use the Programming Keypad ..........................................................................................................102

4.2.3 How to Use the Enter Key and Cursor Keys .................................................................................................103

4.2.4 How to Use the Operator Keys ......................................................................................................................103

4.2.5 How to Read System Status LED Indicators .................................................................................................105

4.3 How to Operate the Control Panel .................................................................................................... 106

4.3.1 How to Operate the Panel in Normal Operation ............................................................................................107

4.3.2 How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Condition ........................................................................................107

4.3.3 How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Monitor Point .................................................................................109

4.3.4 How to Operate a Panel with a Fire Alarm ....................................................................................................109

4.3.5 How to Operate a Panel with a Supervisory Condition .................................................................................110

4.3.6 How to Operate a Panel with a Non-Alarm Condition ..................................................................................111

4.3.7 How to Operate the Panel with an Output Circuit Trouble ...........................................................................111

4.3.8 How the Control Panel Indicates a Panel Circuit Trouble .............................................................................112

4.4 Control-By-Event Operation .............................................................................................................. 112

4.5 Releasing Functions ............................................................................................................................. 113

4.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................113

4.5.2 How to Select Cross Zone Options ................................................................................................................113

4.6 Releasing Functions ............................................................................................................................. 114

4.7 Intelligent Detector Functions ............................................................................................................ 115

4.7.1 Summary of Detector Functions ....................................................................................................................115

4.7.2 Pre-Alarm Operation/Advanced Warning Addressable Combustion Sensing (AWACS™) ........................115

4.8 Time Functions..................................................................................................................................... 116

4.8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................116

4.8.2 Coding Operation (NAC only) ......................................................................................................................117

4.8.3 Presignal/PAS Operation ...............................................................................................................................117

4.8.4 Special System Timers ...................................................................................................................................118

4.8.5 Waterflow Circuits Operation ........................................................................................................................118

4.8.6 Disable/Enable Operation ..............................................................................................................................118

4.8.7 Style 6 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................118

4.9 Read Status ........................................................................................................................................... 118

4.9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................118

4.9.2 How to Enter Read Status ..............................................................................................................................119

4.9.3 Read Status Options .......................................................................................................................................119

4.9.4 Read Point ......................................................................................................................................................119

4.9.5 Using the History Buffer ................................................................................................................................124

6


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Appendix A Power Supply Calculations........................................................... 126

A.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 126

A.2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit.................................................................................................. 126

A.3 The Main Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 127

Current Limitations in Standby ..............................................................................................................................127

Current Limitations in Alarm – System Operation on Primary Power ...................................................................127

A.4 Calculating the System Current Draw............................................................................................. 128

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................128

How to Use Table 47 to Calculate System Current Draws .....................................................................................128

A.5 Calculating the Battery Size.............................................................................................................. 130

A.6 Selecting and Locating Batteries ...................................................................................................... 131

A.7 NFPA Battery Requirements ............................................................................................................ 131

Appendix B NFPA Applications......................................................................... 132

B.1 Section Overview................................................................................................................................ 132

Specific Requirements ............................................................................................................................................132

Additional Requirements ........................................................................................................................................132

B.2 Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises) ............................................................ 133

Installing a Notifier 911AC ....................................................................................................................................133

Installing a UDACT ................................................................................................................................................134

B.3 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System............................................................................................ 135

B.4 Wiring a Remote Station Fire Alarm System .................................................................................. 136

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................136

Using a 4XTM Module ...........................................................................................................................................137

Using an RTM-8 Module ........................................................................................................................................138

B.5 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ...................................................................................... 138

Appendix C Annunciators.................................................................................. 140

C.1 LCD-80 Display.................................................................................................................................. 140

ACS Mode ..............................................................................................................................................................140

Terminal Mode ........................................................................................................................................................140

C.2 Terminal Mode (LCD-80) Annunciation Interface (TB5 on CPU) ............................................... 140

C.3 ACS Annunciation Interface (TB5 on CPU) ................................................................................... 141

Supported Modules .................................................................................................................................................141

C.4 Annunciator Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 141

Data Formats for Annunciator Address 1 ...............................................................................................................141

Data Formats at Annunciator Address 2 .................................................................................................................141

C.5 Terminal Mode EIA-485 Connections (TB5)................................................................................... 144

C.6 LCD-80 ACS Mode EIA-485 Connections ...................................................................................... 145

C.7 Power Connections for LCD and ACS Series Annunciators ......................................................... 146

C.8 ACS and LDM Series EIA-485 Connections ................................................................................... 147

Appendix D Releasing Applications ................................................................. 148

D.1 NFPA Standards................................................................................................................................. 148

D.2 Programming Releasing Zones ......................................................................................................... 148

Releasing Zone Functions .......................................................................................................................................149

Delay Timer ............................................................................................................................................................149

Cross Zoning ...........................................................................................................................................................149

Soak Timer (NFPA 16 Applications Only) .............................................................................................................150

Abort Timer ............................................................................................................................................................151

Special Module Type Codes ...................................................................................................................................151

Abort Switch ...........................................................................................................................................................151

Man. Release ...........................................................................................................................................................151

Rel Ckt ULC ...........................................................................................................................................................152

Release Ckt .............................................................................................................................................................152

Initiating Devices ....................................................................................................................................................152

Warning Sounders ...................................................................................................................................................152

Auxiliary Control Relay Functions .........................................................................................................................153

ACS Annunciation ..................................................................................................................................................153

Deluge/Pre-Action Release .....................................................................................................................................153

D.3 Connecting Releasing Devices........................................................................................................... 153

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


7

Connecting a Releasing Device to a Control Panel through an SLC Control or Relay Module ............................154

Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Releasing Abort Station ................................................................................154

Appendix E Combination Fire/Burglary Applications ..................................... 157

E.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 157

E.2 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 157

Installation Overview ..............................................................................................................................................157

Installing a Tamper Switch .....................................................................................................................................157

Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications ..............................................................................................158

Connecting to an AM2020/AFP1010 Receiving Unit ............................................................................................159

E.3 Programming...................................................................................................................................... 159

E.4 Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 160

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................160

Configuring the Keypad for a Security LED Indicator ...........................................................................................160

Control Panel Operation in a Security Condition ...................................................................................................160

Appendix F Wire Requirements......................................................................... 161

Appendix G Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications ............................................ 162

G.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 162

G.2 Pre-Alarm Applications ..................................................................................................................... 162

Pre-Alarm Alert Level ............................................................................................................................................162

Action Level Pre-Alarm Function ..........................................................................................................................163

G.3 Pre-Alarm Programming................................................................................................................... 163

Pre-Alarm Programming Screen .............................................................................................................................163

Selecting Pre-Alarm Application Levels ................................................................................................................164

Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm Function .....................................................................................................................165

Audible Warning Applications for AWACS™ .......................................................................................................166

Appendix H Special Zones................................................................................. 167

H.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 167

H.2 Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)................................................................................ 167

Presignal ..................................................................................................................................................................167

Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) .............................................................................................................................167

H.3 Time Control ...................................................................................................................................... 168

H.4 NAC Code Types................................................................................................................................ 168

Appendix I Terminal Interface Protocol ............................................................ 169

I.1 General Description ............................................................................................................................ 169

I.2 Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................. 169

Local Terminal Mode (LocT) .................................................................................................................................169

Local Monitor Mode (LocM) .................................................................................................................................170

Remote Terminal Mode (RemT) .............................................................................................................................170

I.3 Using the CRT-2 for Read Status ....................................................................................................... 171

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................171

Accessing Read Status Options ..............................................................................................................................171

Read Point ...............................................................................................................................................................172

Display Devices in Alarm or Trouble .....................................................................................................................172

Display the Status of all Programmed Points .........................................................................................................172

View the History Buffer ..........................................................................................................................................173

Send the History Buffer to the CRT-2 .....................................................................................................................173

I.4 Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status ....................................................................................................... 173

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................173

Accessing Alter Status Options ..............................................................................................................................174

Enable or Disable Detectors, Modules, or Bell Circuits .........................................................................................174

Change Detector Sensitivity Levels ........................................................................................................................175

Clear the Verification Counter ................................................................................................................................175

Clear the Entire History Buffer ...............................................................................................................................175

Set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action Level ..........................................................................................................176

CRT-2 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................176

Appendix J Expansion Power Supplies............................................................ 177

J.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 177

8


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply ....................................................................................................................177

APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply ...........................................................................................................................177

J.2 Programming....................................................................................................................................... 179

J.3 Supply Calculations ............................................................................................................................ 179

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E Calculations ..........................................................................................................................179

APS-6R Calculations ..............................................................................................................................................180

J.4 Installation........................................................................................................................................... 180

Installing the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E .........................................................................................................................180

Installing the APS-6R .............................................................................................................................................183

Appendix K UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements ...................................... 186

K.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 186

K.2 Typical Circuit with Nonpower-limited and Power-limited Wiring ............................................. 186

Appendix L U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s Register ........................................... 187

Appendix M CBE Programming......................................................................... 189

M.1 Purpose............................................................................................................................................... 189

M.2 Software Zones .................................................................................................................................. 189

M.3 How to Program CBE....................................................................................................................... 189

CBE Example 1 ......................................................................................................................................................189

CBE Example 2 ......................................................................................................................................................190

Appendix N External Battery Charger............................................................... 191

N.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 191

N.2 Installation Requirements ................................................................................................................. 191

N.3 Mounting the CHG-120..................................................................................................................... 191

Mounting the Charger into a CAB-X3 Series Cabinet ...........................................................................................191

Mounting the Charger into a Battery Box ..............................................................................................................192

N.4 Connecting the CHG-120 .................................................................................................................. 194

Connecting a CHG-120 to the AFP-200 .................................................................................................................194

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


9

About This Manual

Scope of this Manual

This manual contains the following:

Section 1 “System Overview” provides a description of the control panel and system components, a list of related system documentation, electrical specifications, and cabinet dimensions.

Section 2 “Installation” provides instructions for installing the basic and optional system components, and provides a checklist for testing an installed system and the batteries.

Section 3 “Programming” provides instructions for customizing the fire alarm system by selecting and setting program options for addressable SLC devices, NACs, and

Panel Circuits.

Section 4 “Operation” provides instructions for operator use of the fire alarm system.

Appendix A “Power Supply Calculations” provides current draws for system components and calculation tables for determining the power required to operate the control panel during fire alarm and AC loss of power conditions.

Appendix B “NFPA Applications” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up the control panel for NFPA applications.

Appendix C “Annunciators” provides information about annunciating control panel points and contains instructions and wiring diagrams for connecting annunciators to the control panel.

Appendix D “Releasing Applications” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up the control panel for releasing applications.

Appendix E “Combination Fire/Burglary Applications” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up the control panel for security applications.

Appendix F “Wire Requirements” provides wire requirements for circuits connected to the control panel.

Appendix G “Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up the control panel for AWACs applications.

Appendix H “Special Zones” provides descriptions and options for Special Zones used to define presignal and PAS selections, Time Control selection, Holiday selections, and

NAC Code Types.

Appendix I “Terminal Interface Protocol” provides detailed information about the terminal operating modes: Local Terminal Mode (LocT), Local Monitor Mode (LocM), and Remote Terminal Mode (RemT). The appendix also contains instructions for using a CRT-2 for Read Status and Alter Status (Change Status) operations.

Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up the panel to use external power supplies.

Appendix K “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements” provides UL wiring requirements and sample wiring diagrams for power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring.

Appendix L “U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s Register” provides a list of equipment suitable for use in marine and shipyard applications as compatible with this control panel.

10


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Appendix M “CBE Programming” provides information and programming examples to set up the fire alarm system to use Control-by-Event.

Appendix N “External Battery Charger” provides information and wiring diagrams for setting up an external battery charger for use with the panel.

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

!

!

This manual contains notes, cautions, and warnings to alert the reader to as follows:

•

Note

– Supplemental information for a topic, such as tips and references, that typically appear in the left margin.

•

Caution

– information about procedures that could cause programming errors, runtime errors, or equipment damage.

•

WARNING

– indicates information about procedures that could cause irreversible damage to the control panel, irreversible loss of programming data or personal injury.

Typographic Conventions

For presentation and printing, this manual uses different typeface characters, in place of the actual LCD letters that you see on the LCD display. This manual uses the following conventions for entering data and pressing control panel keys, as listed in Table 1:

When you see

text in small caps text in quotes bold text a graphic of the key

Specifies

the way the text appears in the

LCD display

Example

MARCH TIME

is a selection that appears in the LCD display a reference to a section

In body text, a key on the control panel

In a graphic, a key as it appears on the control panel

TAMPER

shows a Type Code selection as it appears in the

LCD display

“Program Change” specifies the

Program Change section.

Press the

Enter

key

Press the

1

key

Press

Table 1 Typographic Conventions in this Manual

General Terms

Unless noted, general terms reference the specific part numbers listed Table 2:

General Term

Auxiliary Power Supply

AVPS-24

Control module

CPU

CRT

LCD display

Monitor Module

PRN

Relay module

Specific Part Number(s)

APS-6R

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

FCM-1

AFP-200 circuit board

CRT-2

80-character LCD (liquid crystal display)

FMM-1 or FMM-101

PRN-5

FRM-1

Table 2 General Terms

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


11

Supplemental Information

Table 3 contains a list of documents that contain additional information on the

AFP-200:

For information on Refer to Part Number

All features

System Connections

AFP-200 Data Sheet

AFP-200 Basic System Drawing

DN-3783

51265

Compatible Devices Device Compatibility Document 15378

Off-line programming and installation Veri•Fire Medium Systems CD: AFP-200 Upload/Download Utility Verifire-CD

Networking applications

Networking applications

SLC Wiring Instructions

Annunciators

Auxiliary Power Supplies and Battery

Chargers

NAM-232 Network Adaptor Module Manual

Noti•Fire•Net Manual

Noti•Fire•Net Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher

SLC Wiring Manual

Annunciator Control System

Annunciator Fixed Module

ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module

LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator

LCD-80 Manual

LCD-80TM Manual

RPT-485W/RPT-485WF EIA-485 Annunciator Loop Repeater

APS-6R Installation Manual

ACPS-2406 Auxiliary Power Supply Manual

CHG-120 Battery Charger Manual

FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply

50038

50257

51584

51253

15842

15048

15342

15885

15037

51082

15640

50702

51304

50641

50059

Cabinets

Network Interface

Transponders

Universal Digital Alarm

Communicator/Transmitter

Universal Zone Coder

Voice Alarm Systems

CAB-3 Installation Drawing

NIB-96 Network Interface Board

XP5 Series Manual

DPI-232 Manual

RFX Wireless Interface System

The UDACT Manual

911AC Manual

411UD

411

411UDAC

UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder

UZC-256 Programming

VEC-25/50 Voice Alarm System Manual

RM-1 Series Remote Microphone - PID

15330

15666

50786

51499

51012

50050

74-06200-005

50759

50921

51073

15216

15976

50686

51138

Table 3 Supplemental Documentation

12


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Agency Standards and Compliance

This control panel complies with the following NFPA standards:

• NFPA 12 CO

2

Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure Only)

• NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems

• NFPA 12B Halon 1211 Extinguishing Systems

• NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems

• NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems

• NFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Foam/Water Spray Systems

• NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems

• NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems

• NFPA 72 Central Station Signaling Systems (Automatic, Manual, and Waterflow). Protected Premises Unit

(Requires 411UDAC or NOTI•FIRE 911AC DACT or MS-5012 Slave Communicator)*

• NFPA 72 Local Fire Alarm Systems

• NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems. (Requires 4XTM or RTM-8)

• NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems.

(Requires 4XTM or 411UDAC DACT or NOTI•FIRE 911AC DACT*)

• NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises Unit)

(Requires Potter #EFT-C McCulloh Transmitter)*

• NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

• United States Coast Guard–Fire Protection System. (Marine Approvals require CAB-AM.)

• Lloyd’s Register –Marine, Offshore and Industrial Category ENV1 and ENV2*

* Applications which require the 411UDAC, the NOTI-FIRE 911AC, or the Potter EFT-C are not FM approved.

The installer should also be familiar with the following documents and standards:

NFPA Standards

• NFPA 72 Automatic Fire Detectors

• NFPA 72 Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Notification Appliances for Fire

Alarm Systems

• NFPA 72 Testing Procedures for Signaling Systems

• NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

Underwriters Laboratories Documents:

• UL 38 Manual Actuated Signaling Boxes

• UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station

• UL 228 Door Closers - Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications

• UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Alarm systems

• UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances

• UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

• UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances

• UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems

Standard CAN/ULC-S527-M87 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems

Other:

• EIA-485 and EIA-232 Serial Interface Standards

• NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods

• NEC Article 760 Fire Alarm Systems

• Applicable Local and State Building Codes

• Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction

• Notifier Device Compatibility Document

• ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


13

System Overview

General Description

Section 1 System Overview

1.1 General Description

The AFP-200 is a compact, cost-effective, intelligent fire alarm control panel with an extensive list of powerful features. The power supply and all electronics are contained on a single circuit board, providing a complete fire control system for most applications. Optional modules which plug into the main circuit board are available for special functions.

1.2 Features

• Single standard communication

(SLC) loop, meets NFPA Style 4, 6, or 7 requirements

• 198 intelligent device capacity

• Four Notification Appliance Circuits standard

• Optional RTM-8 eight-zone relay module with transmitter

• Optional 411, 411UD, 411UDACT, or 911AC Digital Alarm

Communicator/Transmitter

• Optional UDACT Universal Digital

Alarm Communicator/Transmitter

• LCD-80 liquid crystal display, mounts up to 6,000 feet (1,828.8 m) from panel

• ACS annunciators, including LDM custom graphic annunciators

• ACM-8R remote relay module, increases point capacity

• Printer interface

• Real time clock, with European format option

• History file with 650 event capacity

• Intelligent features

• Sensitivity display in percent

• Manual sensitivity adjustment

• Day/Night automatic sensitivity adjustment

• Drift compensation (U.S. patent pending)

• Auto detector test (meets NFPA 72)

• Maintenance Alert

• Pre-Alarm (AWACS™ — 2 levels)

• LED blink control

• Releasing features

• Four independent hazards

• Cross zone (three methods)

• Delay timer

• Soak timer

Figure 1 identifies major features of the control panel.

• Abort — four options

• Manual release

• Waterflow (non-silenceable) selection per module point

• Supervisory selection per point with separate LED

• Alarm Verification

• Walk Test

• Positive alarm sequence (PAS) pre-signal per NFPA 72

• Silence Inhibit timer option

• Auto silence timer option

• March time/temporal code

• Two-stage option for Canada

• California code

• Tornado warning code

• Remote Ack/Silence/Reset/Drill via

Monitor Modules

• Automatic time control functions, with holiday exceptions

• Autoprogram (learn mode) reduces installation time

• Password- and key-protected nonvolatile memory.

• Programmable from a PC with a

Windows®-based programming utility

• Rapid poll algorithm for manual stations (U.S. patent pending)

• Operates up to 1,000 feet (304.8 m) with untwisted, unshielded wire

(U.S. Patent 5,210,523)

• Operates sounder base on Action

Pre-Alarm level with general evacuation on alarm level.

• Burglar alarm point option.

• Read status on program via modem using dial-up phone lines.

• Marine cabinet option (CAB-AM)

14


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Components

System Overview

:

LCD-80 Remote Display/Control

(up to 32 devices)

EIA-485

Up to 68 fully programmable output circuits

Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) up to 198 devices

FSP-751 FSI-751 FST-751

ACS EIA-485

NBG-12LX

Monitor Control

Module Module

XP Transponder

Annunciator control points IDC NAC

AFP-200

ACM-8R

ACM/AEM-16AT annunciator

Optional 396-channel UDACT

EIA-232 terminal

LDM-32 custom graphics

Dual phone lines to

Central Station

To other

FACP

PRN printer CRT terminal

Figure 1 AFP-200 System Features

1.3 Components

1.3.1 Membrane Switch Panel

Figure 2 shows the membrane switch panel which includes the following:

• Windows for the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and six system status indicator

LEDs.

• Programming keys, including a 12-key alphanumeric pad (similar to a telephone keypad) an

ENTER

key, and four arrow movement keys.

• Slide-in labels, which provide switch and LED description for the six system status indicator LEDs and the four operator keys.

Liquid

Crystal

Display

1

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

12-key alphanumeric programming keypad

J K L

5

M N O

6

P R S

7

T U V

8

Q

Z

DET

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

ENTER

switch

SUPERVISORY

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

ENTER

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

SYSTEM

RESET

Cursor movement keys

System status indicator LEDs

Slide-in labels

Figure 2 Membrane Switch Panel

Membrne

Four operator keys

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


15

System Overview

Components

System Status Indicator LEDs

Figure 2 shows the location of the control panel system status indicator LEDs.

• AC Power (green)

• System Alarm (red)

• Pre-Alarm Warning (yellow)

• Supervisory/Security (yellow)

• Alarm Silence (yellow)

• System Trouble (yellow)

For descriptions of each System Status LED Indicator, refer to Section 4 “Operation”.

Operator Keys

Figure 2 shows the location of the following operator keys:

• Acknowledge/Step

• Alarm Silence

• Drill

• System Reset (lamp test)

For descriptions of each operator key, refer to Section 4 “Operation”.

Programming Keypad

Figure 2 shows the location of the control panel keypad switches, the cursor keys, and the

ENTER

key.

• Twelve-key pad with 0-9, *, #

• Four cursor keys (up, down, right, left)

•

ENTER

key

1.3.2 Panel Sounder

The control panel provides audio signals for alarm, trouble, and supervisory/security conditions through an onboard panel sounder. For more information on the panel sounder, refer to Section 4 “Operation”.

1.3.3 Output Circuits (TB2)

Output circuits consist of four Class B (Style Y) Notification Appliance Circuits

(NACs) or releasing circuits (fully programmable). For installation instructions, refer to

“Output Circuits (TB2)” on page 35.

1.3.4 Relays (TB3)

The control panel includes three dry contact relays for system alarm, system trouble, and supervisory. Contacts are rated 2 A at 30 VDC and 0.5 A at 30 VAC (resistive). For installation instructions, “Standard Relays (TB3)” on page 36.

16


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Main Assemblies

System Overview

1.4 Main Assemblies

The AFP-200 main assemblies include the CPU board, the cabinet for enclosing the control panel, the transformer assembly, and the batteries.

1.4.1 CPU Board

The control panel circuit board contains the system’s central processing unit (CPU), power supply, and other primary components. The CPU is delivered pre-mounted in the cabinet. Figure 3 shows the components of the CPU board, such as terminals, LEDs, and connectors. For details of the membrane switch panel, see Figure 2 on page 15.

TB3

Relays – refer to “Standard Relays

(TB3)” on page 36

TB2

Notification Appliance Circuits– refer to “Output Circuits (TB2)” on page 35

TB1

DC power – refer to “DC Output

Power Connections (TB1)” on page 35

J10

External power supply connection for

AVPS-24 or APS-6R (refer to Appendix J

“Expansion Power Supplies”)

TB4

EIA-232 connections – refer to

“EIA-232 Devices – Remote Printers and

CRTs (TB4)” on page 37

TB5

EIA-485 connections – refer to

Appendix C “Annunciators” Annunciators

TB6

SLC connections – refer to “Wiring a

Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)” on page 41

JP6, JP7

External power – cut jumpers if AVPS-24 or

APS-6R installed (refer to

Appendix J “Expansion

Power Supplies”)

Battery Trouble LED

(yellow)

High Rate Charge LED

(green)

JP7

JP6

SW2

SW3

SW2

EIA-485 Select switch (left =Terminal; right =ACS)

SW3

AC Delay

Reporting

JP2

JP2

External charger

(cut if using CHG-120 external charger)

CB1

Circuit Breaker

J6-J-8

Option module slot (refer to “Option

Module: Transmitter

Module - 4XTM” on page

20

JP5

TB7

AC Power (refer to “AC Power

Connections (TB7)” on page 33)

4XMM

Meter

Module option

(refer to “Meter

Module” on page

20)

JP1 JP9

JP3

JP5

Option board

(cut jumper if option board installed)

Batteries (

two

12 AH batteries shown)

J2

Voltmeter connector

J3

battery – refer to 2.4.2 “Battery

Power Connection (J3)”.

J4

Ammeter connector

JP1

Ammeter option (cut if ammeter installed)

Afp2incab

JP3

Tamper – cut jumper to enable supervision for expansion power supply (Appendix J

“Expansion Power Supplies”) or for tamper switch

J11

APS Supervisory/Tamper Switch

JP9

Ground fault (cut jumper to disable ground fault detector)

Ground Fault LED (yellow)

Figure 3 Connections and Controls (Shown Without Dress Panel)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


17

System Overview

Main Assemblies

1.4.2 Cabinet

The CPU board mounts in a compact (16.125" x 14.5" x 5.5") cabinet with a front dress plate. The cabinet provides space for two batteries (up to 12 AH).

1.4.3 LCD Display

The control panel uses an 80-character LCD display (4 rows of 20 characters each). The display includes a long-life LED backlight that remains on unless AC power is lost while the system is not in alarm:

AFP-200

ANALOG@FIRE@PANEL

ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL

11:00@MON@5/19/98

Figure 4 LCD Display

1.4.4 Membrane Switch Panel

The membrane switch panel provides LED Status

Indicators, operator keys, and programming keys. The operator keys and LEDs are visible with the cabinet door closed. The programming keys are visible only with the door open. Slide-in labels are provided for switch and

LED descriptions. Refer to “Membrane Switch Panel” on page 15.

1.4.5 Transformer Assembly

The transformer assembly includes two 100 VA transformers and a connector.

1

Q

Z

DET

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM

RESET

Membrne

1.4.6 Batteries

The cabinet provides space for 7 AH or 12 AH batteries

(for 18 AH batteries use the BB-17 battery box). Batteries must be ordered separately.

18


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Optional Devices & Option Modules

System Overview

1.5 Optional Devices & Option Modules

Several optional components can be installed within this fire alarm control system, including external devices and “option modules” that plug directly into the CPU. The

CPU board includes an option module slot located on the right side of the board. When an option module is installed, jumper JP5 (Figure 3 on page 17) must be cut. The option slot supports a 4XTM or RTM-8 module.

For instructions on installing an option module, refer to 2.10 “Option Module

Installation”.

RTM-8 module installed in option slot

Figure 5 Option Module Slot (Shown with RTM-8 Module)

Further information and installation instructions for specific devices are provided in those product manuals; for part numbers of manuals refer to Table 3, “Supplemental

Documentation,” on page 12.

1.5.1 Digital Communicator

The 911AC Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter transmits three zones of information (System Alarm, System Trouble, Supervisory) to the central station or remote station receiver. Fully UL-listed for fire operation (NFPA 72), the 911AC requires two standard dial-up telephone lines to operate. For details, refer to the 911AC

Manual.

1.5.2 UDACT

The UDACT transmits system status for up to 99 zones to UL-listed Central Station Receivers over a public switched telephone network. It mounts remotely in the

ABS-8R enclosure. The unit connects to the EIA-485 annunciator port and 24 VDC (nominal) power; software PN 73609 or higher must be installed. Some

NFPA applications are provided in Appendix B. For further details, refer to the UDACT manual.

J5

1.5.3 Network Interface Board - NIB-96

A microprocessor- controlled module that connects slave control panels to a master control panel. The board can be installed in each slave FACP. Each slave

FACP can contain as many as 96 input/output points, or as few as eight points. Refer to the NIB-96 Network

Interface Board manual for further information and installation instructions.

SLC ONLINE

RS485 ONLINE

TROUBLE

P2

P3

SIZE

SWITCH SETTINGS

1

4

5

2

3

6

7

8

9

0

NO OF POINTS

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

80

96

SLC P5 RS485 P4

CONFIG

SIZE

SW1

TENS

SW2

P1

ONES

SW3

SW4

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


19

System Overview

Optional Devices & Option Modules

1.5.4 Field Charger/Power Supply - FCPS-24

A compact, cost-effective remote power supply and battery charger. It consists of a filtered, 24 VDC output that can drive up to four Notification Appliance Circuits

(NACs). Refer to the FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power

Supply manual for further information and installation instructions.

D.C. V OLTS

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

D.C . AMPERES

0 .2

.4

.6

.8

1.0

TB1

P3

TB2

++

1.5.5 Battery Charger - CHG-120

Designed to charge lead-acid batteries that provide emergency standby power for a Fire Alarm Control Panel.

Provides two (2) output circuits for connection to multiple loads. Can be mounted into a CAB-3 Series cabinet or a

BB-55 or NFS-LBB Battery Box. For details, refer to the

CHG-120 Battery Charger manual.

SW1

TB1

R104

R100

JP8

TB4

++ + + ++ + + + + + +

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

TB3

JP7

JP4 JP5 JP6

TB3

TB2

F3 F2 F1

JP3

JP9

1.5.6 Liquid Crystal Display - LCD-80

An alphanumeric display module that is an ancillary device which has two basic modes of operation. In

Terminal Mode

it acts as a display interface and in

ACS

Mode

as an alphanumeric annunciator. The

LCD-80TM

is also available and provides

Terminal Mode

only. Refer to the LCD-80 manual or LCD-80TM Liquid Crystal Display manual.

1.5.7 Option Module: Transmitter Module - 4XTM

The 4XTM provides connections to municipal box and remote station transmitters meeting NFPA 72 Auxiliary and Remote Station requirements. The 4XTM is mounted on the control panel’s CPU and includes a

Disable switch and an LED indicator. Refer to 2.10.2

“Installing a 4XTM Module”.

1.5.8 Option Module: Relay/Transmitter Module - RTM-8

The Relay/Transmitter Module (RTM-8) provides eight

Form-C relays (5A contacts) that track software zones 1 through 8. The RTM-8 also provides Municipal Box and

Remote Station transmitters NFPA 72 Auxiliary and

Remote Station requirements. In remote station applications, the RTM-8 transmits alarm only and does not transmit trouble or supervisory status. Disable switches and indicators are included. Refer to 2.10.3

“Installing an RTM-8 Module”.

1.5.9 Meter Module

The 4XMM Meter Module provides a voltmeter to measure voltage across the batteries and an ammeter to measure charging current to the batteries. A single assembly containing both meters mounts in the lower-left corner of the AFP-200 cabinet as shown in Figure 3 on page 17.

20


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Intelligent Detectors

System Overview

1.5.10 Trim Ring

The TR-4XG gray trim ring is available for semi-flush mounting of the control panel cabinet. See Figure 7 on page 29 for an illustration of the trim ring installed.

1.5.11 Battery Box

The BB-17 battery box may be used to mount two 18 AH batteries. The box mounts directly below the control panel cabinet. See Figure 6 on page 28 for an illustration of the battery box dimensions.

1.5.12 Dress Panel

A dead front dress panel (DP-AFP200) is available as an option (required for Canadian and FM installations).

1.5.13 Expansion Power Supplies

(AVPS-24 and APS-6R)

Power supply model AVPS-24/AVPS-24E provides an additional 3 amps of notification appliance power

(Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”) and the APS-6R provides 6 amps of additional notification appliance power. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible notification appliances.

1.5.14 Marine Cabinet

Cabinet CAB-AM is required for applications requiring United States Coast Guard or

Lloyd’s Register approvals. Refer to Appendix L “U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s

Register” on page 187.

1.6 Intelligent Detectors

Intelligent, addressable detectors provide analog information to the control panel on a

Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). This allows the control panel to continually process this information to determine the status of each detector (alarm, trouble, maintenance, or normal). Each detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the detector head using built-in rotary decimal switches. The sensitivity of each intelligent detector can be programed at the control panel. (Refer to Section 3 “Programming” for details.)

Detector heads mount to a separate base for ease of installation and replacement, as described below.

A blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates communication between the detector and the control panel.

Detectors

•

FSI-751.

Analog, addressable, low profile intelligent smoke detector that incorporates an ionization sensing chamber. Designed to provide open area protection.

•

FSP-751.

Same as FSI-751, but uses a photoelectric sensing chamber. The

FSP-751T

adds thermal sensors that will alarm at a fixed temperature of 135° F. Designed to provide open area protection.

FSI-751, FSP-751

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


21

System Overview

Addressable Modules

•

FST-751.

Intelligent thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. Designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability. The

FST-751R

incorporates a thermal rate of rise of

15°F (9.4°C).

•

FSD-751P.

Photoelectric Duct Detector. The

FSD-751RP

includes an alarm relay.

•

HPX-751.

A special smoke detector that provides early warning smoke detection in hostile environments where traditional smoke detectors are not practical.

Detector Bases

Several bases, to which the detectors are affixed, are available:

•

B710LP.

Standard U.S. Low-Profile base

•

B501.

Standard European flangeless base

•

B501BH.

Sounder base, includes B501

•

B524RB.

Intelligent relay base

•

B524BI.

Intelligent isolator base

•

B224RB.

Low Profile Intelligent relay base

•

B224BI.

Low Profile Intelligent isolator base

•

B710HD.

HARSH detector base

Accessories

The following is available:

FST-751

•

RA400Z.

A Remote Single LED Annunciator that can be wired directly off of an addressable detector for annunciation of that detector's alarm status.

1.7 Addressable Modules

1.7.1 Overview

Addressable modules include:

•

Control modules.

Provide an interface between the control panel and conventional notification appliances such as horns and bells.

•

Relay modules.

Route power to relays under specified conditions; relays can control non-resistive loads within power supply limitations.

•

Monitor modules.

Provide an interface between the control panel and initiating devices, such as pull stations.

You can set each control, relay and monitor module to respond to an address with built-in rotary decimal switches.

Note: A blinking LED on a monitor, control or relay module indicates communication between the module and the control panel.

1.7.2 Module Descriptions

The monitor, control and relay modules and other addressable modules described below can be used with the control panel:

Control Modules.

FCM-1 control modules are used as

Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) to power and supervise compatible, UL-listed notification appliances. Wire supervised circuits as NFPA Style Y or Style Z. Comes with a thermoplastic cover for mounting to a 4-inch (10.16 cm) square mounting box.

5

4

3

2

6 7

1

TENS

8 9

10

11

12

0 15

14

13

6 7

8 9

10

11

12

5

4

6 7

3

2

1

0

ONES

FCM-1

22


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Addressable Modules

System Overview

Monitor Modules: FMM-1, FZM-1, FMM-101.

Addressable modules used to monitor conventional initiating devices. Use the FMM-1 for normally open contact alarm initiating devices, such as manual pull stations, four-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, waterflow, security contacts, and supervisory devices. Use the FZM-1 for specific two-wire smoke detectors in addition to normally open contacts. Wire supervised circuits as NFPA Style B or Style D circuits. Use the FMM-101 when mounting directly in the electrical box of the device being monitored; this smaller package is limited to

Style B circuits only and does not include a blinking LED or a magnetic test switch.

5

4

3

2

6 7

TENS

5

6 7

1

0

6 7

8 9

15

10

14

11

12

13

4

3

2

6 7

1

0

ONES

FMM-1, FZM-1

13

12

14 15

11

10

9

0

8 7

TENS

6

1

2

3

5

4

ADDRESS

LOOP

0 1

2

3

9

8 7

ONES

6

5

4

FMM-101

Relay Module.

FRM-1 serves as a Form-C control relay. It resembles an FCM-1 and also comes with a thermoplastic cover for mounting to a 4-inch (10.16 cm) square mounting box.

LOOP

9

8

7

4

3

5

6

2

1

TENS

6

7

0

7

8

10

11

12

13

15

14

8 9

0

1

2

6

5

3

2

1

ONES

3

4

ADDRESS

FRM-1

XP5-C Modules.

XP5-C Modules allow the AFP-200 to control a maximum of five individual circuits. These modules can be configured as NACs/telephone or relay circuits. Their function is similar to that of the control or relay modules described above.

XP5-M Modules.

XP5-M Modules allow the AFP-200 to monitor a maximum of five individual circuits. Their function is similar to those of the monitor modules described above.

Loop Isolator Module (ISO-X).

The ISO-X module is an automatic switch that opens the circuit voltage to a communications loop branch(es) whenever a fault is detected on that circuit. The remainder of the communications loop leading up to the ISO-X continues to operate, unaffected by the fault.

NBG-12LX.

A dual action addressable manual pull station featuring a key-lock reset. The pull station includes a mini-monitor module and responds to an address set with built-in rotary decimal switches.

NBG-12LRA.

A dual-action agent release station featuring an abort switch, release LED, normal LED, and a key-lock reset.

The release station includes a mini-monitor module and responds to an address set with built-in rotary decimal switches.

SYSTEM

NORMAL

SYSTEM

ACTIVATED

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


23

System Overview

End-of-Line Devices

1.8 End-of-Line Devices

1.8.1 Overview

Table 4 contains a list of the end-of-line devices that you can install in an AFP-200 system:

Option

A2143-00

(System Sensor)

A2143-10

(System Sensor)

N-ELR Resistor plate (Notifier)

Description Notes

A 47K End-Of-Line Resistor (ELR) Assembly

ELR used in the supervision of monitor, control and relay module circuits.

Supplied with monitor, control and relay modules.

The 3.9K End-Of-Line Resistor (ELR) Assembly used with two-wire detector modules.

Supplied with two-wire detector modules.

An N-ELR, required for Canadian installations, provides connection for a resistor to mount to an ELR plate.

• Use 4.7K for the NAC circuits.

• Use 47K for monitor, control and relay modules.

Table 4 End-of-Line Devices

1.9 Annunciation Modules

For instructions on installing annunciation modules, refer to

Appendix C “Annunciators” on page 140.

1.9.1 Overview

This section contains brief descriptions and the model numbers of annunciator modules that can be connected to the control panel. Communication between the control panel and annunciators takes place over a two-wire serial interface connected to an EIA-485 connector (TB5) on the CPU. For detailed wiring requirements, refer to the appropriate annunciator manuals.

Canadian Requirement: The ACM Series annunciator modules must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only. For Canadian applications, the following LED colors must be employed:

• Red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs

• Yellow must be used to indicate supervisory, burglary or trouble signals

• Green must be used to indicate the presence of power or an activated output

1.9.2 Annunciator Control Module-8R (ACM-8R)

The ACM-8R provides the AFP-200 with a mappable relay control module. ACM-8R relays can be selected for mapping anywhere in the system memory map (in groups of eight). Features of the ACM-8R include the following:

• Provides eight Form-C relays with 5 A contacts.

• Tracks any group of eight zones within the system.

1.9.3 LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules

The LDM-32 Lamp Driver Annunciator Module provides

32 alarm lamp driver outputs for connection to a custom graphic annunciator. You can also set the LDM-32 with a

DIP switch for 16 alarm, 16 trouble and 16 switch inputs for control of such system functions as Signal Silence and

System Reset.

• Lamp Driver Annunciator Expander Module

24


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Annunciation Modules

System Overview

(LDM-E32) – Expands the LDM-32 by 32 system points, to a maximum of 64 points.

• Relay Expander Module (LDM-R32) – Provides the LDM-32 or LDM-E32 with

32 dry Form-A (normally open) contacts.

1.9.4 Annunciator Control System (ACS)

The ACS series annunciator and control system provides the control panel with up to 32 remote annunciators, each with a capacity of 64 points. Table 5 contains brief descriptions of ACS annunciators. For detailed information, refer to the ACS

Manual.

Module

Annunciator

Control

Module-16AT

(ACM-16AT)

Annunciator

Expander Module

(AEM-16AT)

Annunciator

Control

Module-32A

(ACM-32A)

Annunciator

Expander

Module-32A

(AEM-32A)

Features

The ACM-16AT provides features for audible and visual indication of alarm and trouble conditions at each annunciator. These features include: 1) 16 red alarm LEDs; 2) 16 yellow trouble LEDs; 3) 16 momentary touch-pad switches for controlling each point; 4) a system trouble LED; 5) an Online/Power LED; 6) a local sounder; 7) a

Silence/Acknowledge switch; and remote functions.

The AEM-16AT, identical in size and appearance to the ACM-16AT, expands the ACM-16AT by 16 system points. An ACM-16AT can support up to three AEM-16ATs, to a provide a maximum of 64 system points.

Note: An AEM-16AT cannot be used to expand an ACM-32A.

The ACM-32A provides features for audible and visual indication of alarm and trouble conditions at each annunciator. These features include: 1) 32 red alarm LEDs; 2) a system trouble LED; 3) an Online/Power LED; 4) a local sounder; and 5) a Silence/Acknowledge switch.

The AEM-32A, identical in size and appearance to the ACM-32A, expands the ACM-32A by 32 system points. An ACM-32 can support one

AEM-32A, providing a maximum of 64 system points.

Note: An AEM-32A cannot be used to expand an ACM-16AT.

Table 5 ACS Modules

1.9.5 Annunciator Fixed Modules

Annunciator Fixed Modules (AFM-16AT and AFM-32A) provide the control panel with discrete display and control points. AFMs turn their LEDs on and off as directed by the CPU, and also report switch activations to the CPU for action. You can only use one AFM in a system. Each annunciator’s address is fixed at address 1.

• AFM-16AT – The AFM-16AT contains 16 red alarm and 16 yellow trouble LEDs, a system trouble LED, an On-line/Power LED, and a local sounder, and switches for control panel Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset. Use the

AFM-16AT for systems that require 16 or fewer annunciation points.

• AFM-32A – The AFM-32A contains 32 red alarm LEDs, a system trouble LED, an

ON LINE/POWER LED, and a local panel sounder with a silence/acknowledge switch. The AFM-32A is fixed at address 1, and will not accept expander modules.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


25

System Overview

EIA-232 Peripheral Devices (TB4)

1.10 EIA-232 Peripheral Devices (TB4)

1.10.1 Overview

The control panel is compatible with the following printers and display devices that connect through the EIA-232 interface on CPU terminal TB4:

• PRN printer

• Keltron remote printer

• CRT-2 display terminal

For installation instructions for these devices, refer to “EIA-232 Devices – Remote

Printers and CRTs (TB4)” on page 37.

1.10.2 PRN Remote Printer

The PRN is an optional printer that connects directly to the control panel through TB1 on the CPU and can be located up to 50 feet (15.24 m) from the control panel. It features the following:

• Provides a printed record (80 columns of data on standard 9" x 11" tractor-feed paper) of all system events (alarm, trouble) and status changes within the system.

• Time-stamps the printout with the current time-of-day and date.

Note: Time stamping is a function of the AFP-200 panel.

1.10.3 Keltron Remote Printer (Model VS4095)

The VS4095 is a two-color (red and black), 40-column, 24

VDC printer that can print up to 50 messages in 90 seconds. This printer connects to the EIA-232 TB4 in the control panel through TB1 on the CPU, from which it gets its power, and mounts in a separate cabinet next to the control panel. The VS4095 meets UL fire and security requirements for an ancillary device. For more information on the Keltron printer, contact the manufacturer (Keltron Corp., Waltham, MA). Refer to “Keltron Printer” on page 38 for installation instructions.

1.10.4 CRT-2 Display Terminal

The optional CRT-2 Display Terminal connects to the control panel via the EIA-232 serial interface (TB4) and can be located up to 50 feet (15.24 m) from the control panel. The CRT-2 displays data on 26 lines by 80 columns and allows you to do the following:

• Control and view events, points, and event history

• Control the system (Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset).

• Change important system operating parameters, such as enable/disable of addressable points, change alarm and pre-alarm sensitivities, clear verification counters, clear history, and set the pre-alarm action level.

26


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Specifications

System Overview

1.11 Specifications

This section contains electrical specifications for the control panel.

1.11.1 Primary AC Power (TB7)

Primary AC connections are made through TB7 on the AFP-200. Wire size: minimum

14 AWG with 600 VAC insulation.

• AFP-200. 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3.0 A

• AFP-200E. 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A

1.11.2 Battery (lead-acid only)

Maximum Charging Circuit Dual Rate High Charge is 29.1 V @ 0.7 A

Normal Flat Charge is 27.6 V @ 0.5 A

Maximum Battery Capacity 18 AH. (Batteries larger than 12 AH require a BB-17 or other UL-listed battery cabinet.)

1.11.3 Signaling Line Circuit (TB6)

Connections between the control panel and the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) are supervised and power-limited.

Voltage

Maximum length

Maximum loop current is

Maximum loop resistance

24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC Max.

10,000 ft. (3048 m) per channel (NFPA Style 4) or

10,000 ft. (3048 m) total twisted-pair length (NFPA

Style 6 and 7)

250 mA (max short circuit) or 100 mA (normal)

40 ohms

1.11.4 Notification Appliance and Releasing Circuits (TB2)

The following contains specifications for NACs and releasing circuits available on the

AFP-200 (all circuits are power-limited).

Max. wiring voltage drop

Normal Operating Voltage

NAC circuit 1

NAC circuits 2-4

2 VDC

24 VDC.

2.5 A

2.5 A shared total

Current for all external devices 5.0 A

Optional AVPS-24/AVPS-24E Additional 3.0 A of notification appliance power (see

Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”)

Optional APS-6R Additional 6.0 A of notification appliance power (see

Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”)

Max. signaling current/circuit 2.5 A

End-of-line resistor 4.7K, 1/2-Watt (PN 71252 UL-listed) for NACs)

Releasing circuits REL-4.7K; for control module — REL-47K

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


27

System Overview

Cabinet Dimensions

1.11.5 Relays (TB3)

Relays for Alarm, Trouble, Security, and Supervisory are available on terminal TB3 for power-limited circuits only. Contact ratings for relays through TB3 are:

• 2.0 A at 30 VDC (resistive), 0.5 A at 30 VAC (resistive)

• Alarm and Trouble: Form-C

• Supervisory: Form-A

1.11.6 24 VDC Power (TB1)

Terminal Block (TB1) provides 24 VDC power as follows:

Four-wire Smoke Detector Power

(24 VDC ± 5%) – TB1-5 and

TB1-6

Non-resettable 24 V Power (24

VDC ± 5%) – TB1-3 and TB1-4

• Max. ripple voltage: 10 mVrms

• Up to 500 mA is available for powering four-wire smoke detectors

1,2

• Max. ripple voltage: 10 mVrms

• Total DC current available from this output is up to

500 mA (subtracted from four-wire smoke power)

2

High Ripple Regulated 24 V

Power (24 VDC ±10%) – TB1-1 and TB1-2

• Max. ripple voltage: 2 Vrms

• Total DC current available for powering external devices is 1.0 A standby and 1.5 A alarm

2

.

This power is not recommended for LCD-80 or ACS annunciators except for an ACM-8R.

1

For power supply calculations, refer to Appendix A.

2

Total current for regulated power, non-resettable power, four-wire smoke power, and four

Notification Appliance Circuits must not exceed 5 A or 8 A if using an AVPS-24 (refer to

Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”) or APS-6R. Total external system current in excess of

2.5 A requires 12 AH or 18 AH batteries—not 7 AH.

1.12 Cabinet Dimensions

1.12.1 Surface Mount with a BB-17 Battery Box

Figure 6 shows dimensions for mounting a cabinet with a BB-17 Battery Box.

Door = 14.625" (37.1475 cm)

Backbox = 14.5" (36.83 cm)

Depth = 5.5" (13.97 cm)

Door = 16.125"

(40.9575 cm)

Backbox = 16.0"

(40.64 cm)

Depth = 4.75" (12.065 cm)

Battery Box = 8.25"

(20.955 cm)

(Optional BB-17)

28

Battery Box = 14.5" (36.83 cm)

(Optional BB-17)

Figure 6 AFP-200 Cabinet and BB-17 Battery Box Dimensions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Cabinet Dimensions

System Overview

1.12.2 Semi-flush Mount

Figure 7 shows dimensions for semi-flush mounting of the AFP-200 cabinet using a

TR-4XG Trim Ring.

Trim Ring = 17.62"

(44.7548 cm)

1.5" (3.8 cm) typical for 4" (10.16 cm) wall

Trim Ring = 19.12"

(48.564 cm)

Figure 7 Dimensions with TR-4XG Trim Ring

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


29

Installation

Preparing for Installation

Section 2 Installation

2.1 Preparing for Installation

2.1.1 Unpacking the System

Carefully unpack the system and inspect for shipping damage.

Select a location for the control panel in a clean, dry, vibration-free area with moderate temperature.

2.1.2 Installation Notes

Before installing the fire alarm system, read the following:

• Install the system in a readily accessible area with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the control panel.

• Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 60 inches (1.524 m) above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left.

• Count the number of conductors needed for all devices and find the appropriate knockouts.

• Review the installation precautions at the front of this manual.

• All wiring must comply with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems.

• Do not draw wiring into the bottom 9 inches (22.86 cm) of the cabinet, except when using the BB-17. This prevents interference between the power supply and batteries.

2.1.3 Standards and Codes

In addition, installers should be familiar with the following standards:

• NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods.

• NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

• Applicable Local and State Building Codes.

• Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

30


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Installation Checklist

2.2 Installation Checklist

Installation

!

!

!

CAUTION: Make sure to install system components in the precise order in the checklist. Failure to do so can damage the control panel and other system components

Table 6 contains an installation checklist for installing, wiring, and testing an AFP-200 system:

Task Refer to

Mount the cabinet backbox to the wall.

If using expansion power supplies, mount the expansion power supply to the backbox.

CAUTION: Connect the AC power cable and DC battery cables.

CAUTION: Do not connect power at this time!

Mount an optional module (RTM-8 or 4XTM).

Install optional peripheral devices, such as a printer, personal computer, or CRT-2 terminal.

Wire the Signaling Line Circuits.

Connect AC power to control panel — but do not connect batteries.

Check AC power—but do not connect batteries.

Program the control panel.

Connect the batteries.

Walk test the system.

“Backbox Mounting” on page 32

Appendix J “Expansion Power

Supplies”

“AC and DC Power Connections” on page 33

“Option Module Installation” on page 61

“EIA-232 Devices – Remote

Printers and CRTs (TB4)” on page 37

“Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit

(SLC)” on page 41

“AC Power Connections (TB7)” on page 33

Table 7

Section 3 “Programming”

“Battery Power Connection (J3)” on page 34

“How to do a Walk Test (6=walk test)” on page 99

Table 6 Installation Checklist

Table 7 contains a checklist for checking the system with AC power applied:

CAUTION: While checking AC power, make sure batteries are not connected.

Component Status

The CPU option module

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R

The green AC Power indicator on; the system Trouble indicator on because of no battery power.

The yellow Trouble indicator may come on for approximately 10 seconds after applying AC power. (This only applies to an unconfigured system.)

The yellow Trouble indicator comes on because batteries are not connected.

Table 7 AC Power Checklist

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


31

Installation

2.3 Backbox Mounting

Figure 8 shows the dimensions of the cabinet backbox:

1.0"

(2.54 cm)

12.5" (31.75 cm)

14.5" (36.83 cm)

0.5"

(1.27 cm)

Backbox Mounting

9.5"

(23.495 cm)

16.0"

(40.64 cm)

Figure 8 Backbox Dimensions

1. Remove the CPU board assembly by unscrewing the four screws in the corners of the board. Set the CPU board aside in a safe, clean place. Avoid static discharge which may damage the board.

2. Mark and predrill the four mounting bolts using dimensions shown in Figure 8.

3. Install two upper fasteners in wall with screw heads protruding.

4. Using upper keyholes, mount the backbox over the two screws. Tighten the screws.

5. Install and tighten the lower two screws.

6. When location is dry and free of construction dust, reinstall the CPU board.

32


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

AC and DC Power Connections

Installation

2.4 AC and DC Power Connections

This section contains illustrations and instructions for connecting AC and DC power to the control panel.

!

!

WARNING: Several different sources of power can be connected to the control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. The control panel and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or connecting cables while this control panel is energized.

WARNING: Use extreme caution when connecting power—high voltage and AC line-connected circuits are present in the control panel. Turn off and remove all power sources. To reduce the risk of electric shock—make sure to properly ground the control panel.

2.4.1 AC Power Connections (TB7)

Primary power required for the AFP-200 is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 A and primary power required for the AFP-200E is 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or local codes. Use 14 AWG or larger wire with 600 VAC rating. Connect AC power, using a grounded power cord, to the TB7 on the control panel as follows:

1. Turn off all power sources to the control panel.

2. Insert the stripped ends of the power cord through the knockout on the bottom of the control panel (Figure 9).

3. Connect the earth ground (green) wire to the TB7 terminal labeled “GND”.

4. Connect the neutral wire to the TB7 terminal labeled “NEUT”.

5. Connect the hot wire to the TB7 terminal labeled “HOT”.

TB7

– AC power connector

AC power cord

Knockout in bottom of cabinet

Figure 9 AC Power Connections (TB7)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


33

Installation

!

AC and DC Power Connections

2.4.2 Battery Power Connection (J3)

WARNING: Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes, and can destroy fabrics. If contact is made with sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

Observe polarity when connecting the battery to the control panel. To connect the battery to the control panel, follow these steps:

1. Calculate the battery rating and size required for your installation. For instructions, refer to Appendix A.

2. Connect the battery cable to J3 on the CPU board using the plug-in connector provided.

J3

Battery Power

Battery cable

Figure 10 AC and Battery Power Connections

2.4.3 Expansion Power Supplies – AVPS-24 or APS-6R

(Optional)

Expansion power supplies can provide additional notification appliance power for

Notification Appliance Circuits 3 and 4 (TB2) on the control panel. The control panel can accommodate one of the following expansion power supplies:

• the Audio/Visual Power Supply (AVPS-24);

or

• the Auxiliary Power Supply (APS-6R).

For detailed information, including installation instructions, refer to Appendix J

“Expansion Power Supplies”.

34


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

DC Output Power Connections (TB1)

Installation

2.5 DC Output Power Connections (TB1)

Figure 11 shows the outputs for DC voltage connections from TB1 on the CPU:

Note: All DC power outputs are power-limited.

Non-resettable Power

24 VDC filtered, regulated, non-resettable power can be drawn from TB1 terminals 3 (+) and 4 (–).

Four-wire Smoke Detector

Power

24 VDC filtered, regulated, resettable power for four-wire smoke detectors can be obtained from TB1 terminals 5 (+) and 6 (–).

High Ripple Regulated Power

24 VDC power for notification appliances. TB1 terminal 1 (+) and

2 (–). Note: This power is unsuitable for all EIA-485 annunciation devices, except the ACM-8R.

Figure 11 DC Output Power Output Connections

2.6 Output Circuits (TB2)

Output circuits consist of Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) connected through

TB2 on the control panel. When connecting output circuits, note the following:

• Use UL-listed 24 VDC notification appliances only. Refer to the Device

Compatibility Document for a list of compatible devices.

• Circuits are supervised and power-limited.

Figure 12 shows typical connections for NACs connected to TB2.

2.6.1 Notification Appliance Circuits

The control panel provides four Notification Appliance Circuits (Style Y). Each NAC can supply up to 2.5 A of current. Total current drawn from these as well as DC power outputs cannot exceed 5.0 A. An additional 3.0 A are available when using an expansion power supply (AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R). For details on expansion power supplies, refer to Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


35

Installation

Standard Relays (TB3)

Note: Notification circuit polarity shown in alarm state.

4.7K, 1/2-Watt (PN 71252 UL-listed)

Polarized Bell

+ -

T

B

1

Polarized Strobe

Polarized Horn

Style Y Notification

Appliance Circuit

(supervised and power-limited)

+ –

+ -

Dummy Load all unused Circuits 4.7K,

1/2-Watt

T

B

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

T

B

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 12 Output Circuit Connections (TB2)

2.7 Standard Relays (TB3)

The control panel provides a set of Form-C alarm and a set of Form-C trouble contacts rated for 2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive). The control panel also provides a Form-A supervisory contact rated for 2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive).

36

Form-C contacts

Form-A contact

Figure 13 Relay Connections (TB3)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


EIA-232 Devices – Remote Printers and CRTs (TB4)

Installation

2.8 EIA-232 Devices – Remote Printers and CRTs (TB4)

2.8.1 Overview

The PRN remote printer provides a hardcopy printout of all status changes within the system and time-stamps the printout with the current time and date from the panel. The

PRN provides 80 columns of data on standard 9-inch by 11-inch (22.86 cm by 27.94 cm) tractor-feed paper.

2.8.2 Printer Configuration

Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN for instructions on the printer’s menu controls. Set the printer’s options as listed in Table 8.

Baud

Format

Protocol

Character

S1. Zero

Auto LF

Menlock

Paper:

Bin 1

Bin 2

Single

Pull Tra

Pap Roll

Paport

Option

L/R Adjust

Font

LPI

ESC Character

Bidirectional Copy

CG-Tab

Country

Auto CR

Color Option

Formlen:

Lines

Standard

CPI

Skip

Emulate

I/O:

Setting

0

Draft

6 LPI

Esc

On

Graphic

E–US ASCII

ON

Not installed

6 LIP-60

Executive 10.5

10 CPI

0.0"

Epson

40KB

2400

7 bit, Even, 1 Stop

XON/XOFF

Extended

On

Off

All

12/72"

12/72"

12/72"

12/72"

12/72"

No

Table 8 PRN Remote Printer Options

2.8.3 Installation

Remote printers require 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz primary power. A secondary power source

(battery backup) is not provided. The use of a separate uninterruptable power supply

(UPS), UL-listed for Fire Protective Signaling is recommended.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


37

Installation


Plug the DB-9 or DB-25 connector into the EIA-232 port of the printer.

7

Connection between the control panel and the PRN is via an EIA-232 interface. A custom cable must be assembled for connection to the printer's EIA-232 port.

3 2 1

DB-25 Connections:

Connect TX (Pin 3) to TB4 terminal 1

Connect REF (Pin 7) to TB4 terminal 2

Connect RX (Pin 2) to TB4 terminal 3

Note: When using a DB-25 for Upload/Download connect a jumper between pin 6 and pin 20.

DB-9 Connections:




Note: If also using a DB-9 connector for upload/download connect a jumper between pin 4 and pin 6.

1 2 3 4 5 6

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

The EIA-232 printer interface may also be used with EDP UL-listed equipment, such as personal computers, to monitor the control panel for supplementary purposes.

Figure 14 Remote Printer Connections

2.8.4 Keltron Printer

Figure 15 shows typical connections between the control panel and a Keltron printer.

Keltron Printer

Model number VS4095/5

(see note 3)

Plug this DB-25 connector into the

EIA-232 port of the printer

7 3 2 1

Keltron Remote Printer

DC IN+

DC IN -

24VDC (14 AWG)

38

TB1

TB2 TB3

TB4

TB5

Figure 15 Keltron Printer Connections

TB6

Notes on Figure 15:

1. Outputs are power-limited, but are not supervised.

2. Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted paired cable

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Installation suitable for EIA-232 applications. Typically, 50 feet (15.24 m) is the maximum recommended wiring distance between printer and control panel.

3. The printer communicates using the following protocol:

Baud rate

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

2400

Even

Seven

One

4. Set DIP switches SP1 and SP2 on the Keltron printer as follows:

SP1-1: OFF

SP1-7: ON

SP2-4: OFF

SP1-2: ON

SP1-8: OFF

SP2-5: OFF

SP1-3: OFF

SP2-1: OFF

SP2-7: ON

SP1-4: ON

SP2-2: OFF

SP2-8: OFF

SP1-5: OFF

SP2-3: OFF

For terminal interface and protocol information, refer to

Appendix I.

2.8.5 CRT Connections

This section shows how to connect a CRT to the control panel and how to connect a combination of CRTs and printers (daisy chain). Figure 16 shows typical connections for a CRT to the control panel:

7 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

TX REF RX REF OUT OUT IN IN

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB4

TB5 TB6




Figure 16 CRT Connections

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


39

Installation

Twisted Pair


Figure 17 shows typical connections for daisy chaining multiple CRTs, printers, or both. (Refer to CRT configuration in Appendix I.)

To TB4-2

To TB4-1

To TB4-3

7

To AUX Port of CRT

3 2 1

7 3 2 1

To EIA Port of CRT with keyboard

7 3 2 1

To EIA Port of next

CRT or PRN

Figure 17 Connections For Multiple CRTs or Combined CRTs and Printers

40


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

Installation

2.9 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

2.9.1 Overview of SLC Wiring

Communication between the control panel and intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices takes place through a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). You can wire an SLC to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 circuits.

This section covers the topics outlined in Table 9:

Topics

Setting an Address for a monitor, control, or relay module

Methods for terminating wiring leaving the control panel

Wire Requirements for a Two-wire SLC

Wire Requirements for a Four-wire SLC

Wiring an ISO-X

Isolator Module

Wiring a Conventional

Initiating Device Circuit

(IDC)

Wiring Notification

Appliance Circuits

(NACs)

Wiring an Intelligent

Detector

Wiring an Addressable

Manual Pull Station

Refer to

Figure 22.

“SLC Shield Termination” on page 43.

“Wire Requirements for a Two-wire SLC” on page 45, which covers:

• Loop resistance for a Two-wire SLC.

• Total wiring length for a Two-wire SLC.

• Typical Wiring for a Two-wire SLC.

“Wire Requirements for a Four-wire SLC” on page 46, which covers:

• Loop resistance for a Four-wire SLC.

• Total wiring length for a Four-wire SLC.

• Typical Wiring for a Four-wire SLC.

“Wiring an Isolator Module (ISO-X)” on page 49, which covers:

• Description of an ISO-X Module

• Isolating a Branch of a Two-wire SLC

“Wiring an IDC with Monitor Modules” on page 50, which covers:

• Description of Monitor Modules

• Wiring a Two-wire or Four-wire IDC.

“SLC Wiring with Control Modules” on page 57, which covers:

• Description of control/relay modules

• Wiring a Relay Module

• Wiring a Control Module

• Wiring a Two-wire NAC (Style Y)

• Wiring a Four-wire NAC (Style Z)

“SLC Wiring with an Intelligent Detector” on page 59

“SLC Wiring with an NBG-12LX Addressable Manual Pull Station” on page 60

Table 9 SLC Wiring Topics

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


41

Installation

Refer to the installation drawings supplied with each loop device for rating and specification information.


2.9.2 SLC Devices

Communication with intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices takes place through a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). You can wire an SLC to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 circuits. Table 10 contains descriptions of devices connected to an SLC:

Type of Device SLC Function

Isolator Modules

(ISO-X)

Addressable

Monitor Modules

Control Modules

Allows a zone of detectors and modules to be electrically isolated from the remainder of the loop, which lets critical loop components function if a circuit fails. ISO-X modules are required for NFPA Style 7 circuits.

Allows the control panel to monitor entire circuits of conventional alarm-initiating devices, such as manual pull stations, detectors, waterflow and supervisory devices.

Allows the control panel to selectively activate Notification Appliance

Circuits (NACs).

Allows the control panel to selectively activate Form-C output relays.

Relay Modules

XP5-M

XP5-C

Allows the control panel to monitor up to five Initiating Device Circuits

(IDCs). Each XP5-M occupies five consecutive addresses on the SLC.

Allows the control panel to control a maximum of five individual notification appliance/telephone circuits or Form-C relays. Each XP5-C occupies five consecutive addresses on the SLC.

Intelligent Detectors Allows the control panel to communicate with intelligent ionization, photoelectric, and thermal detectors on the SLC.

Addressable Pull

Station

The NBG-12LX provides a manual method of creating an alarm activation.

Table 10 SLC Devices

Maximum wiring distance of an SLC:

•

Style 4.

10,000 ft. (3048 m) (12 AWG)

•

Style 6, 7.

10,000 ft. (3048 m) (12 AWG) total twisted-pair.

2.9.3 Control Panel Capacity

AFP-200 capacity includes up to 99 intelligent detectors and an additional combination of up to 99 addressable pull stations, and monitor, control and relay modules. In addition, the control panel also supports four Notification Appliance Circuits and up to

99 programmable relays.

JP7

JP6

SW2

SW3

JP2

SLC – Up to 198 intelligent/addressable devices

JP1 JP9

JP3

JP5

42

Afp2incab

Figure 18 AFP-200 Capacity

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Scrape paint away from the cabinet to make good electrical connections.

Installation

2.9.4 SLC Performance

SLC performance depends on the type of circuit: Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7. Table 11 lists the trouble conditions that result when a fault exists on an SLC.

Fault in SLC Style 4 Style 6 Style 7

Open

Ground

Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Short Trouble

Short and open Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Alarm /Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Trouble

Short and ground

Open and ground

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Alarm /Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Alarm/Trouble

Communications loss

Trouble Trouble Trouble

•

Trouble

indicates a trouble signal will be generated at the control panel during the abnormal condition.

•

Alarm/Trouble

indicates an alarm signal can be transmitted to the control panel during the abnormal condition.

• SLC operation meeting Style 7 requirements isolates entire physical zones on the SLC from faults that occur within other areas of the SLC.

Table 11 SLC Performance

2.9.5 SLC Shield Termination

Overview

All wiring leaving the control panel must be shielded. Figure 19, Figure 20, and Figure

21 show three methods of wiring termination, depending on the type of conduit used: a) no-conduit, b) full-conduit, and c) partial-conduit.

No-Conduit Shield Termination

Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the system cabinet. Connect the drain wire to the outside of the cabinet using a cable connector as shown in Figure 19:

Shield Drain Wire

Cabinet

SLC +

SLC -

The shield drain wire must be connected to the negative (–) side of the loop. Do not let the shield drain wire or the shield foil touch the system cabinet.

Figure 19 Shield Termination – No Conduit

Full-Conduit Shield Termination

For Style 6 or Style 7 field-wiring of the SLC, connect each end of the shield to the negative side of the respective channel as shown in Figure 20:

Cabinet

Shield Drain Wire: The shield must not be connected to earth ground at any point.

SLC +

SLC -

Figure 20 Shield Termination – Full Conduit

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


43

Installation

If the length of conduit from the control panel cabinet exceeds

20 feet (6.096 m), terminate the shield as shown. If using a metal box, you must use a metal conduit.


Partial-Conduit Shield Termination

Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the system cabinet or the conduit. Connect the drain wire to the termination point of the conduit run.

Shield Drain Wire

Cabinet

SLC +

SLC -

Figure 21 Shield Termination – Partial Conduit

2.9.6 Setting an SLC Address for a Module

Each module can be set to one of 99 addresses (01-99) and is factory preset with an address of “00”. Addresses past 99 are not recognized by this system.

To set an SLC address, use a common screwdriver to adjust the rotary switches on the module to the desired address. The unit below is set at “35”. When finished, mark the address on the module face in the place provided.

Rotary Switches

4

5

3

2

6 7

1

0

8 9

10

11

12

15

14

13

TENS

4

5

3

2

6 7

8 9

1

0

ONES

Breakaway Tab - Devices come with a raised breakaway tab on the TENS rotary switch. This tab must be left intact for this system.

Figure 22 Setting SLC Address on Module

44


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation

2.9.7 Wire Requirements for a Two-wire SLC

Measuring Loop Resistance for a Two-wire SLC

The total DC resistance from panel to branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms. Measure DC resistance as shown in Figure 23:

SLC Out

Branch

For detailed wiring requirements, refer to Appendix F.

Figure 23 Measuring DC Resistance of a Two-wire SLC

1. Short the termination point of one branch at a time. Measure the DC resistance from the beginning of the loop to the end of that particular branch.

2. Repeat this procedure for all remaining branches in the SLC.

Measuring Total Wire Length for a Two-wire SLC

The total length of wire (12 AWG) in a two-wire SLC cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3048 m). Find the total length of wire in the SLC by summing the wire lengths on each branch of the SLC. Figure 24 shows how to find the total length wire in a typical two-wire SLC.

!

(Branch A)

+(Branch B)

+(Branch C)

+(Branch D)

+ (Branch E)

=10,000 feet (3048 m) or less

(12 AWG)

CAUTION: Terminate shield drain wire according to the instructions in “SLC

Shield Termination” on page 43.

Branch B

Branch D

Branch C

Branch E

Loop Out Branch A no connection

CPU

TB6

Figure 24 Measuring the Total Length of Wire in a Two-wire SLC

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


45

Installation


2.9.8 Wire Requirements for a Four-wire SLC

Measuring Loop Resistance for a Four-wire SLC

The total DC resistance of the SLC pair cannot exceed 40 ohms. Measure DC resistance as shown in Figure 25. For detailed UL wiring requirements, refer to Appendix F.

1. Disconnect the SLC Out and SLC Return at the control panel.

2. Short the two leads of SLC Return.

3. Measure the resistance across the SLC Out leads (Figure 25).

SLC Out

SLC Return

T-Tapping is not allowed on a four-wire SLC.

Figure 25 Meter Leads for Measuring a Four-wire SLC

Measuring Total Wire Length for a Four-wire SLC

The total length of wire (12 AWG) in a four-wire SLC cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3048 m). Figure 26 identifies the output and return loops from SLC terminal TB5 on the

CPU:

SLC A (loop return)

SLC B (output loop) no connection

TB5

CPU

Figure 26 Measuring the Wire Length – Four-wire SLC

46


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation

Figure 27 shows typical wiring of a supervised and power-limited two-wire SLC that meets NFPA 72 Style 4 requirements.

!!



Note: ISO-X devices are not required to meet NFPA Style 4. You can install a maximum of 25 devices, detectors, and modules between isolator modules, or isolator detector mounting base.

B710LP Detector Base

Use with FSP, FSI, and FST

Series intelligent detectors

2(+)

1(-)

3

LOOP ADDRESS

TYPE

Low

Med

High

7

6

9

8

5

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

Control or Relay

Module

1 2 3 4

+

Separate T-Tap to other SLC devices

NBG-12LX

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

Monitor Module

1

2

3

4

Loop Isolator Module

1

2

3

4

Loop Isolator Module no connection

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B B+ A+ B- A-

CPU

Connect (+) to TB 6-3

Connect (–) to TB 6-5

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5 TB6

Figure 27 Two-wire SLC (Style 4)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


47

Installation

!!


Figure 28 shows typical wiring for a supervised and power-limited four-wire SLC that meets NFPA 72 Style 6 requirements.



B710LP Detector Base

Use with FSP, FSI, and FST

Series intelligent detectors

2(+)

1(-)

3

LOOP ADDRESS TYPE

Low

Med

High

7

6

9

8

5

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

Control or Relay

Module

1 2 3 4

+

NBG-12LX

7

6

9

8

5

-

+

-

+ 2

3

0

1

4

Monitor Module

3

4

1

2

Loop Isolator Module

1

2

3

4

Loop Isolator Module no connection

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B B+ A+ B- A-

CPU

Connect SLC Out to TB 6-3 (+) and TB 6-5 (–).

Connect SLC Return to TB 6-4 (+) and 6-6 (–).

TB6

Figure 28 Typical Four-wire SLC Circuit (Style 6)

48


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation

Style 7 Wiring Overview

Figure 29 shows typical wiring of a four-wire SLC that meet NFPA Style 7 requirements. As shown in Figure 29, flanking each SLC device with a pair of ISO-X isolator modules protects each device from short circuit faults that may occur on other

SLC devices. For example, a fault on zone 2 will not affect zones 1 and 3. ISO-X modules on either side of zone 2 will open the SLC. Zone 1 will still operate from power on loop out and zone 3 will operate from SLC return. Because the control panel cannot communicate with zone 2, a trouble signal(s) will be generated for that device.

Note: Do not T-Tap or branch a Style 7 four-wire SLC. Ratings and characteristics are identical to a NFPA Style 6 four-wire SLC.

Note: Locate ISO-X module near detector.

Enclose wiring between detector and ISO-X in conduit.

Addressable Manual

Pull Station (flanked by

ISO-X modules)

Note: All wiring between a manual pull station and ISO-X modules should be enclosed in conduit.

Note: If a non ISO base is used, install ISO-X modules on both sides of devices within 20 feet

(6.096 m) in rigid conduit.

ISO-X

1

3

2

2

3 4

ISO-X

1

2

_

3 4

ISO-X

1

2

+

Addressable

Detector

(Zone 1)

1

3

4

Two-wire Isolator

Detector Base

(Zone 2)

SLC Out

2

1

ISO-X

4

3

Addressable

Pull Station

(Zone 3)

+

2

1

ISO-X

4

3

_

SLC Return

Control Panel

1

A

2

3

4 5 6

B B+ A+ B- A-

CPU

Connect SLC Out to

TB 6-3 (+) and TB 6-5 (–).

Connect SLC Return to

TB 6-4 (+) and TB 6-6 (–).

Figure 29 Four-wire SLC (Style 7)

2.9.9 Wiring an Isolator Module (ISO-X)

ISO-X Module Overview

You can connect a maximum of 25 devices between isolator modules. During a fault condition, the control panel registers a trouble condition for each addressable device which is isolated on the SLC segment or branch.

Refer to 2.9.6 “Setting an SLC Address for a Module” for instructions on addressing the modules.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


49

Installation


SLC In (–)

SLC In (+)

SLC Out (–)

SLC Out (+)

Figure 30 ISO-X Module Terminal Connections

Isolating a Branch of a Two-wire SLC

A short circuit on the SLC Style 4 branch (connected to ISO-X terminals 3 and 4) causes the branch to be disconnected and isolated from the remainder of the SLC. This prevents a communication problem with all other addressable devices on the branches

(labeled “Continuation of the SLC” in Figure 31) and all addressable devices on the isolated branch will report a trouble condition at the CPU.

Continuation of the SLC

SLC

T-Tapped branch off the

SLC

Figure 31 Wiring an ISO-X (Style 4)

2.9.10 Wiring an IDC with Monitor Modules

Overview of Monitor Modules

The FMM-1, FZM-1, and FMM-1 Monitor Modules are addressable modules that monitor conventional contact-type, alarm, supervisory, security, alert, or trouble initiating devices. You can wire a supervised monitor-module circuit as an NFPA Style

B or Style D Initiating Device Circuit (refer to Figure 34 and Figure 35 for Style B; refer to Figure 36 and Figure 37 for Style D).

Refer to 2.9.6 “Setting an SLC Address for a Module” for instructions on addressing the modules.

•

FMM-1.

Use for wiring Style B and Style D IDCs.

•

FZM-1.

The FZM-1 Monitor Module is an addressable module used to monitor a single Initiating Device Circuit of smoke detectors. Use FZM-1 modules to monitor conventional, two-wire smoke detectors. The FZM-1 requires an

50


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation additional connection of 24 VDC filtered, low-noise and resettable power on

FZM-1 Terminals 3 (–) and 4 (+).

Rotary Switches

IDC Return +

IDC Return

-

IDC Out +

IDC Out

-

4

3

5

2

1

TENS

4

5

3

2

4

5

3

2

ONES

0

8 9

15

10

14

11

12

13

SLC-

SLC+

24 VDC

-

(FZM-1 only)

24 VDC + (FZM-1 only)

Areas used to record the device address and SLC number.

Figure 32 Standard Monitor Module (FMM-1) and Two-wire Detector Module (FZM-1)

•

FMM-101 (Style B circuits only).

The FMM-101 is a miniature addressable module that is functionally and electrically identical to an FMM-1 module.

Because of the smaller size, an FMM-101 is suitable for mounting directly in the electrical box of a monitored contact-type device.

Labels – Use to

record

the device address and

SLC number.

13

14 15

12

11

10

9

0

1

8 7

TENS

6

2

3

4

5

ADDRESS

LOOP

0 1

9

8 7

ONES

6

2

3

5

4

IDC + (Violet)

IDC - (Yellow)

SLC + (Red)

SLC - (Black)

Figure 33 Miniature Monitor Module (FMM-101)

Wiring a Monitor Module

Connect the SLC wiring to terminals 1 (–) and 2 (+) of FMM-1 and/or FZM-1. SLC wiring on the FMM-101 are the red and black wires identified in Figure 33. The monitor module takes one module address on the SLC.

When installing FMM-1 and FMM-101 modules, note the following:

1. With these modules, the IDC provides the following services (do not mix):

• Fire Alarm Service.

• Automatic/Manual Waterflow Alarm Service with normally open contact devices.

• Sprinkler Supervision with normally open contact devices.

• Security Service.

2. Maximum IDC wiring resistance is 20 ohms.

Note: Refer to Installation Document shipped with each two-wire detector monitor module for specific installation notes for this variety of module.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


51

Installation


Wiring an NFPA Style B IDC with Standard Monitor Modules

Figure 34 shows typical wiring using FMM-1 modules to wire a Style B IDC.

Maximum IDC resistance is 20 ohms. Refer to Device Compatibility Document for detector and power supervision relays.

End-of-Line Resistor

47K, 1/2-watt

PN SSD A2143-00

(N-ELR in Canada)

UL-listed power supervision relay (shown energized)

+

+ -

-

+

+

-

-

24 VDC four-wire smoke detector

+

+ -

-

Manual pull station

+

+ -

-

Heat detector

To next device on the SLC

- +

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

0

1

2

3

4

CPU

1 2 3 4 5 6

+ - + - + -

TB1

B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- B+ B-

TB2

NO C NO NC C NO NC C

TB3

24 VDC four-wire detector resettable power:

24 VDC (+) TB1-5

24 VDC (–) TB1-6

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

SLC out

SLC (+) TB6-3

SLC (–) TB6-5

Figure 34 Typical Style B (Class B) IDC Wiring with FMM-1 Modules

52


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation

Refer to the Device

Compatibility Document for detector and power supervision relays.

•

•

•

Wiring an NFPA Style B IDC with Two-wire Detector Modules

Note: Figure 35 shows typical wiring for a supervised and power-limited NFPA Style B

IDC using FZM-1 modules. Refer to Installation Document shipped with each two-wire detector monitor module for specific installation notes for this variety of module.

Wiring guidelines for this IDC are:

Maximum Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) resistance is 25 ohms.

Maximum alarm current is 90 mA.

Maximum detector standby current is 2.4 mA.

3.9K ELR – supplied with monitor module

+

+

-

-

Compatible two-wire smoke detectors

+

+

-

-

FZM-1

To the next device on the SLC

- +

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

0

1

2

3

4

CPU

1 2 3 4 5 6

+ - + - + -

B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- NO C NO NC C NO NC C

TB1

TB2 TB3

24 VDC filtered, regulated and resettable power:

24 VDC (+) TB1-5

24 VDC (–) TB1-6

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

SLC out

SLC (+) TB 6-3

SLC (–) TB 6-5

Figure 35 Typical Style B (Class B) IDC Wiring with FZM-1

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


53

Installation


Refer to the Device


Wiring an NFPA Style D IDC with Standard Monitor Modules

Figure 36 shows typical wiring for a supervised and power-limited NFPA Style D

(Class A) IDC using monitor modules. Maximum IDC resistance is 20 ohms.

UL-listed power supervision relay (shown energized)

24 VDC four-wire smoke detector

Manual pull station

Heat detector

Monitor

Module


- +

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

0

1

2

3

4

CPU

+ - + - + -


TB1

TB2 TB3

24 VDC filtered, low-noise and resettable power:

24 VDC (+) to TB1-5

24 VDC (–) to TB1-6

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

SLC out

SLC (+) to TB6-3

SLC (–) to TB6-5

Figure 36 Typical Style D (Class A) IDC Wiring with FMM-1

54


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Refer to the Device


Installation

Wring an NFPA Style D IDC with FZM-1 Modules

Note: Figure 37 shows typical wiring for a supervised and power-limited NFPA Style D

(Class A) IDC using FZM-1 modules. Refer to Installation Document shipped with each two-wire detector monitor module for specific installation notes for this variety of module.

Wiring guidelines for this IDC are:

• Maximum Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) resistance is 25 ohms.

• Maximum alarm current is 90 mA.

• Maximum detector standby current is 2.4 mA.

+

+

-

-

Compatible two-wire smoke detectors

+

+

-

-

3.9K ELR – supplied with

FZM-1 module

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

2

3

0

1

4


- +

CPU

1 2 3 4 5 6

+ - + - + -

TB1

B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- B+ B-

TB2

NO C NO NC C NO NC C

TB3

24 VDC filtered, low-noise and resettable power:

24 VDC (+) to TB1-5

24 VDC (–) to TB1-6

TX REF RX REF OUT OUT IN IN

TB4

TB5

SLC out:

SLC (+) to TB6-3

SLC (–) to TB6-5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

Figure 37 Typical Style D (Class A) IDC Wiring with FZM-1 Modules

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


55

Installation


2.9.11 Wiring a Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) or

Control Circuit

Control and Relay Module Overview

The FCM-1 is an addressable module that controls a Notification Appliance Circuit

(NAC). Use the FCM-1 to route 24 VDC NAC Power for NFPA Style Y (Class B) and

NFPA Style Z (Class A) notification circuits. Figure 38 shows control module connections.

Style D NAC (+)

Style D NAC (–)

Style B NAC (–)

Style B NAC (+) no connection

7

6

9

8

5

2

3

0

1

4

no connection

SLC (–)

SLC (+)

24 VDC Power (–)

24 VDC Power (+)

Refer to the installation instruction sheet supplied with the control module for additional information.

Note: Polarity shown in alarm condition

Figure 38 FCM-1 Control Module Connections

The FRM-1 is an addressable module which includes a Form-C dry contact relay which can be used to activate a variety of output circuits. Figure 39 shows relay module connections.

From FACP or previous device on SLC loop

SLC (+) TB6-3

SLC (–) TB6-5

SLC

To next device on SLC

C

NC

NO

C

NC

4

3

5

2

1

TENS

0

8 9

15

10

14

11

12

13

4

3

5

2

1

ONES

0

NO

FRM-1

56

Figure 39 FRM-1 Relay Module Connections

Ratings for the dry contacts on a Form-C relay module are:

Resistive: 3.0 A @ 30 VDC max Non-coded application

Further rating information is available in the module document and data sheet.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Installation

Refer to Device Compatibility

Document for compatible notification appliances and relays.

Installing a Relay Module

Install a relay module by following the instructions below:

1. Connect the SLC from the CPU to relay module terminals 1 (-) and 2 (+) as shown in Figure 39.

2. Set the rotary switches on the relay module to the required SLC address. (The

FRM-1 takes one module address on the SLC. Refer to 2.9.6 “Setting an SLC

Address for a Module” for instructions on addressing the modules.)

3. Wire the common and the normally-open or normally-closed contacts to the relay module (Figure 39).

2.9.12 SLC Wiring with Control Modules

This section contains instructions and wiring diagrams for wiring a control module to polarized alarm notification appliances. Figure 40 provides a diagram for two-wire appliances wired according to NFPA Style Y NAC. Figure 41 provides a diagram for four-wire appliances wired according to NFPA Style Z.

Style Y NAC Circuits (Two-wire)

Figure 40 shows a supervised and power-limited NFPA Style Y NAC using a control module. This shows polarized alarm notification appliances connected to control modules in a two-wire configuration. A control module can control 3 A of resistive load

(on non-coded electronic devices). Further rating information is available in the module document and data sheet. If installing more than one control module NAC, install the power supervision relay on the 24 VDC power bus after the last control module.

• Do not T-Tap or branch a Style Y circuit.

• Terminate the circuit across the last device using a 47K, 1/2-watt ELR

(PN ELR-47K).

• Do not run wiring under any terminals. To maintain supervision, break the wire run.

Wiring Diagram and Instructions

Connect the NAC as follows:

1. Connect the SLC to FCM-1 terminals 1 (–) and 2 (+).

2. Connect 24 VDC power (Figure 40).

3. Set the control module rotary switches to the required SLC address. (The control module takes one module address on the SLC.) Refer to 2.9.6 “Setting an SLC

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


57

Installation


Address for a Module” for instructions on addressing the modules.

End-of-Line Resistor

47K, 1/2-watt

PN SSD A2143-00

(Use an N-ELR in Canada)

UL-listed Power Supervision Relay

+

+ -

-

24 VDC notification appliances

+

+

-

-

Control

Module


- +

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

-

+ 2

3

0

1

4

CPU

1 2 3 4 5 6

+ - + - + -


TB1

TB2 TB3

24 VDC filtered, regulated, nonresettable

24 VDC (+) to TB1-1

24 VDC (–) to TB1-2

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

SLC out

SLC (+) to TB6-3

SLC (–) to TB6-5

Figure 40 Typical Wiring for an NFPA Style Y NAC

58


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Refer to the Device

Compatibility Document for compatible notification appliances.

Installation

Style Z NAC

Figure 41 shows an NFPA Style Z NAC with notification appliances connected to a control module.

Connect the NAC as follows:

1. Connect the SLC to control module terminals 1 (–) and 2 (+).

2. Connect 24 VDC power from TB1 to control module terminals 3 and 4.

3. Set the control module rotary switches to the required loop address. (The control module takes one module address on the SLC.) Refer to 2.9.6 “Setting an SLC

Address for a Module” for instructions on addressing the modules.

Do not loop wiring under any terminals. Break wire run to maintain supervision. The

NAC is supervised and power-limited.

24 VDC notification appliances

+

+

-

-

+

+ -

-

UL-listed Power Supervision Relay

Control

Module


- +

7

6

9

8

5

-

+

-

+ 2

3

0

1

4

CPU

+ - + - + -


TB1

TB2 TB3

24 VDC filtered, regulated, nonresettable

24 VDC (+) to TB1-1

24 VDC (–) to TB1-2

1 2 3 4 5 6

TX REF RX REF

TB4

OUT OUT IN IN

TB5

A B B+ A+ B- A-

TB6

SLC out

SLC (+) to TB6-3

SLC (–) to TB6-5

Figure 41 NFPA Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit

2.9.13 SLC Wiring with an Intelligent Detector

Overview for Wiring Intelligent Detectors

The B501 or B710LP base provides the connection between the SLC and the following intelligent detectors: FSP-751, FSI-751, FST-751, and FST-751R.

1. Connect the communications loop to terminal 1 (–) and terminal 2 (+) on the detector mounting base.

2. If using an RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator: (a) connect the RA400Z positive terminal to base terminal 3; and (b) connect the RA400Z negative terminal to base terminal 1.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


59

Installation


3. Set the detector address on the head with a small, slotted screwdriver. Mark this address on the base and on the head.

4. Install the intelligent detector head.

Wiring an Intelligent Detector to an SLC

Figure 42 shows typical wiring of a detector (wired to a RA400Z remote annunciator) connected to an SLC:

SLC

Channel (+)

Channel (–)

Channel (+)

Channel (–) to next device on SLC

Detector Base

RA400Z Remote

LED Annunciator

Figure 42 Typical Wiring of a Detector Base to an SLC

2.9.14 SLC Wiring with an NBG-12LX Addressable Manual

Pull Station

The NBG-12LX is an addressable manual pull station with a key-lock reset feature.

Figure 43 shows typical wiring and provides instructions for setting the SLC address.

1. Connect the SLC to terminal screws (+) and (–).

2. Connect the NBG-12LX to the CPU as shown in Figure 43.

3. Set the SLC address of the pull station. Rotary switches are located on the interior of the pull station, as shown in Figure 43. The address is set the same way as for control, monitor & relay modules (refer to “Setting an SLC Address for a Module” on page 44). Factory preset is address 00. Record the device address and SLC number on the label inside the pull station.

Note: In the sample shown below, the switches are set to address 12.

60


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Option Module Installation

Installation

-

+

1 2 3 4

13

14

12

15

11

10

0

1

2

ADDRESS

3

4 3 2 1

9

8 7

TENS

6

5

0

1

2

3

9

8 7

ONES

6

5

4

NOR

MAL

ACTIVAT

ED

LOOP

M

ADDRESS

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABEL

NBG-12LX

(rear view)

NBG-12LX

(front view)

1 2 3 4 5 6

TB6

CPU of Control Panel

SLC (+) TB 6-3

SLC (–) TB 6-5

(+)

(-)

To next device on

SLC loop

Figure 43 Typical SLC Wiring of an NBG-12LX Pull Station

2.10 Option Module Installation

2.10.1 Overview

The control panel has an option module slot, using connectors J6, J7, and J8 on the

CPU board. Two optional modules are available for the control panel: the

4XTM

Transmitter Module and the

RTM-8

Relay Module. To enable module supervision, you must cut jumper JP5 before installing an option module. Figure 44 shows the location of the connectors and jumper J5.

JP7

JP6

SW2

SW3

JP2

J6

J7

J8

Jumper JP5

JP1 JP9

JP3

JP5

Afp2incab

Figure 44 Optional Module Location

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


61

Installation


2.10.2 Installing a 4XTM Module

Install the 4XTM module onto the CPU board as follows:

1. Insert the two nylon standoffs (provided) into the holes located on the right-side edge of the main circuit board.

2. Carefully align the pins on the circuit board with the connector on the option board; then, press firmly on the option board until it locks in place on the standoffs.

3. Stick the provided labels on the 4XTM module.

CPU Board

4XTM Option Board

Standoffs

4. Push the disconnect switch (Figure 45) down to prevent unwanted activation of the municipal box during testing of the control panel.

The Disconnect LED remains lighted while the municipal box is disconnected. The

System Trouble LED will indicate disconnected and/or open circuit conditions on the municipal box. During trouble conditions, it is possible to obtain the circuit condition on the alarm reverse-polarity output. If this operation is desired, cut the

TBL jumper (shown in Figure 45)

Figure 45 shows 4XTM module components with polarities shown in activated positions.

Polarities are shown in activated positions.

62

Figure 45 4XTM Module Connections and Components

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Installation

2.10.3 Installing an RTM-8 Module

Install the RTM-8 module onto the CPU board according to the following directions. If the FACP is in a high vibration area where additional support is desired, install the

RTM-8 with a DP-AFP200 Dress Panel, using every step in Figure 46 below. Steps 4 and 8 are not necessary if a dress panel is not installed.

AFP-200 CPU

1

. Remove screw from lower right corner of the AFP-200

CPU board. Reserve the screw for later use.

Note: Remember that jumper

JP5 must be cut to enable module supervision (See

Figure 44 on page 61. )

AFP-200 CPU

2

. Replace the screw with one of the three short (1/2 in, 12.7 mm) metal standoffs supplied with the RTM-8 module.

3

. Place the other two short metal standoffs into the AFP-200

CPU holes as indicated.

Fasten them with two of the nuts supplied with the RTM-8 module.

4

.

Note: Use this step only when using a DP-AFP200 dress panel.

Attach one of the two long

(15/16 in, 23.8 mm) metal standoffs to the upper left corner of the RTM-8 as indicated. Fasten with the third nut supplied.

5

. Carefully align the pins on the circuit board with the connector on the RTM-8 module; then press firmly on the module until it locks in place and rests on the standoffs installed in steps 2 and 3 above.

6

. Secure the upper right corner of the RTM-8 with the

(remaining)

long metal standoff.

7

. Using the screw removed from the AFP-200 CPU and the screw supplied with the RTM-8, secure the module to the

CPU at the points indicated.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

8

.

Note: Use this step only when using a DP-AFP200 dress panel.

Install the DP-AFP200 Dress Panel per instruction document supplied with the dress panel. This installation provides extra mounting support for the module in areas of high vibration.

Figure 46 RTM-8 Relay Module Installation

63


Installation


Figure 47 shows electrical connections for the RTM-8 module.

Local Energy Municipal Box LED (yellow)

Place jumper over pins as indicated

Jumper

JP1 - Cut for polarity reversal remote station operation

JP2 - Transmitter Module Select

JP-2 Jumper Settings

Jumper

Jumper

Alarm/Trouble Polarity Reversal

Remote Station

JP1 must be cut

Alarm only Polarity Reversal

Remote Station

JP1 must be cut

Local Energy Municipal Box

Jumper JP1 is optional

Switch Settings

Disconnected

Normal

Typical Form-C Relay

Configuration

C

NO

NC

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

Zone 6

Zone 7

Zone 8

Transmitter

Output

(-) normal

(+) normal

The RTM-8 module is not suitable for separate transmission of both alarm and trouble signals to remote station.

Relay Disconnect Switch

Transmitter Disconnect Switch

Transmitter Disabled LED (yellow)

Relay Disabled LED (yellow)

Figure 47 RTM-8 Module Connections

Notes on the RTM-8 module

1. Zone Relay Contact Ratings – 6 A @ 30 VDC or 300 VAC. Material: Silver

Nickel.

2. Refer to the power-limited label located on the AFP-200 cabinet door. Make a notation on the label for each circuit used as a nonpower-limited circuit. (Refer to the example on the label).

3. Polarity Reversal Output – 24 VDC (nominal), 10 mA maximum rated current.

Internal resistance: 1200 ohms (nominal). Intended for connection to the polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving circuit (Fire•Lite RS-82) having compatible ratings. Output is power-limited. Wiring can exit the protected premises.

4. Municipal Box output – Supervised for open circuit. Nonpower-limited. Maximum short current circuit: 0.6 A. Maximum open circuit voltage: 27.6 VDC. Maximum wire resistance: 3 ohms. Wiring can exit the protected premises.

64


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Overview

Programming

Section 3 Programming

3.1 Overview

The AFP-200 is an intelligent, field-programmable Fire Alarm Control Panel.

Field-programming the control panel lets you customize the fire alarm system by selecting and setting program options for addressable SLC devices (intelligent detectors, monitor modules, relay modules, and control modules), NACs, and Panel

Circuits. There are two levels of programming—Program Change and Status Change.

Each requires a password to restrict programming access to authorized personnel. For more details on Program Change and Status Change options, see Table 12.

3.1.1 Programming Methods

The control panel is completely field-programmable and requires no special software skills. You can program the control panel in one of two ways:

1.

Using the Autoprogram feature and the control panel keypad

is a convenient way to quickly bring the system on-line and to make changes to an existing system program. This chapter provides detailed instructions for programming the control panel using the keypad.

2.

Veri•Fire™

is an off-line programming utility that lets you create site-specific programming information using a Windows®-based computer. It is the preferred method for programs requiring a large amount of data entry. For detailed instructions, refer to Veri•Fire’s on-line help program.

For details on panel operation, refer to Section 4 “Operation”.

3.1.2 In This Section

This section provides information for programming the control panel, divided into the main sections that are listed in Table 12.

Section

Getting Started

Program

Change Options

Status Change

Options

Topic(s) covered

Programming Passwords

How to Use the Programming Keypad

Programming Shortcuts

Upload and Download

Instructions and sample screens for Program Change options used to configure and program operation of the control panel, such as: Autoprogramming, programming points, special zones, and system defaults; changing a program password; and checking the program for errors.

Instructions and sample screens for Status Change options that do not affect configuration or basic operation of the control panel, such as: disabling/enabling points, setting system time/date, clearing counters, setting detector sensitivity, and walk-testing the system.

Refer to page

66

67

68

68

70

92

Table 12 Programming Topics

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


65

Programming

Getting Started

3.2 Getting Started

3.2.1 How to Access Programming Options

To enter Program Change mode or Status Change mode, follow these steps:

1. Press the

ENTER

key to enter programming mode and the LCD display shows the

Programming Entry screen:

1=PROGRAMMING

2=READ@STATUS@ENTRY

(BACKSPACE@TO@ABORT)

Figure 48 Programming Entry Screen

2. Press the

1

key and the following screen appears in the LCD display:

ENTER@PROG@OR@STATUS

PASSWORD,@THEN@ENTER.


Figure 49 Password Entry Screen

3. Enter the Program Change or Status Change password.

3.2.2 Programming Passwords

There are two programming passwords: Program Change and Status Change:

• Program Change password – The password used to access Program Change functions. The Program Change factory-set password is 00000.

• Status Change password – The password used to access Status Change functions.

The Status Change factory-set password is 11111.

Passwords are user-definable (refer to “How to Change a Programming Password

(3=passwd)” on page 85). If you enter an invalid password (or press the

ENTER

key without entering a password), the LCD display shows the Incorrect Password screen, like the one shown in Figure 50:

INCORRECT PASSWORD

PROGRAM: 0000000

STATUS: 0880880

BACKSPACE@TO@ABORT

Figure 50 Sample Incorrect Password Screen

From the Incorrect Password screen (Figure 50), press the

BACKSPACE

key and enter the correct Program Change or Status Change password or contact the manufacturer for assistance.

66


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Getting Started

Programming

3.2.3 How to Use the Programming Keypad

Programming keys (12)

1

G H I

4

J K L

5

M N O

6

cursor keys (4) and

ENTER

key

P R S

7

Q

Z

DET

T U V

8

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

left cursor key

(

BACKSPACE

key) right cursor key

The programming keypad lets you enter numeric and alphabetic characters. Entering alphabetic characters is necessary for functions such as changing the LCD display message (“How to Change a System Message (4=message)” on page 86) and custom zone labels (“How to Change a Zone Label (5=zones)” on page 86). Table 13 shows examples of how to enter alphanumeric characters.

To enter

10

Do this

1. Press , then press

2. Press , then press

D16

1. Press

2. Press

3. Press

two times; then press

, then press

, then press

Smoke 1

1. Press

2. Press

3. Press

4. Press

four times, then press

two times, then press

four times, then press

three times, then press

5. Press

6. Press

three times, then press

two times, then press

7. Press , then press then press

Table 13 Entering Alphanumeric Characters

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


67

Programming

Getting Started

During programming, the control panel automatically returns to normal operation after two minutes of inactivity.

3.2.4 Programming Shortcuts

“Programming Shortcuts” on page 68 lists shortcuts that you can use when programming the control panel.

To

To save a point’s program into memory during

Autoprogram or point programming

To exit from Program

Change or Status

Change operations

To display the last

19-character label

Do this

Press the

ENTER

key. After pressing the

ENTER

key, the autoprogram routine displays the next new detector or module.

Press the

BACKSPACE key until the All Systems Normal screen appears, or press the

SYSTEM RESET

key.

When the blinking cursor is over the first letter of the label field, press the zero key twice to display the label entered for the previous point. If the last character of the label is a number, pressing the zero key a third time will increment this number. Once you recall the label, you can edit each character of the label.

Table 14 Programming Shortcuts

3.2.5 Upload and Download

An upload/download of the control panel may be done at any time by connecting a personal computer to the EIA-232 port and running the off-line programming routine.

Refer to the Veri•Fire on-line help program for more information.

3.2.6 Key Programming Terms

Here is a list of terms that apply to control panel programming.

All Systems Normal message

The message (up to 40 characters) in first two lines of the LCD display during normal system operation.

Autoprogram

A control panel programming function that automatically detects new devices connected to the SLC, assigns default programming information, and also determines the total number of programmed devices.

CBE (Control-by-Event)

A software function that provides a means to program a variety of output responses based on various initiating events.

Control module

Addressable module that switches power to a Style Y or Style Z NAC.

CPU memory

(Central Processing Unit) The nonvolatile element of the CPU that contains programming information for the control panel.

custom label

A custom label is a user-defined message in an LCD display that identifies a device.

detector sensitivity

A detector setting for an ionization or photoelectric detector that determines the level at which a detector will activate.

installed device

An intelligent, addressable detector, control, monitor or relay module properly addressed and installed in a fire alarm system.

missing device

A missing device is a detector or module removed from the SLC (TB6) that exists in the current program.

Monitor module

An addressable monitor module that monitors conventional alarm-initiating devices.

68


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Getting Started

Programming

NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit)

A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance. (Notification appliances include bells, strobes, and horns that produce an audible signal, visual signal, or both.) You can use an NAC for coding functions (March Time, California Code, Temporal, and Two Stage).

new device

New devices include detectors and modules connected to the SLC (TB6) that do not exist in the current program.

obscuration

A smoke measurement, usually expressed in percent per foot (30.48 cm), that calculates reduction in the atmospheric transparency caused by smoke.

panel circuit

One of four NACs (B01, B02, B03, or B04) available through TB2 on the control panel that connects to a notification appliance (such as a bell, strobe, horn, and so on). Each NAC can be programmed with CBE.

point

A detector, module, or panel circuit properly installed, addressed, and programmed into the control panel.

Programming Keypad

A set of keys on the membrane panel used for data entry and selection while programming the control panel.

Relay Module

An addressable module that controls a Form-C relay.

SLC device

An addressable detector, control, monitor or relay module connected to the control panel through TB6.

Type Code

is a control panel software entity that defines the function of a detector, control, monitor or relay module, or panel circuit.

3.2.7 How to Avoid Programming Errors

You can avoid programming errors by making sure to follow these guidelines:

General Alarm (Z00)

If programming general alarm (Z00), note the following:

• Do not program a general alarm (Z00) to a releasing function.

• Do not program a general alarm (Z00) without an input point.

Releasing Zone (91–94)

If programming releasing zones (91–94), note the following:

• Do not program a releasing zone input (91–94) without at least one mapped

RELEASE CKT

output.

• Do not program a

RELEASE CKT

output without programming at least one releasing zone input (91–94).

• Do not program a releasing zone input (91–94) without programming at least one

MAN

.

RELEASE

zone.

• Do not program an Abort timer selected with Delay=00.

Cross Zones

If programming cross zones, a programming error will occur with any of the following conditions:

• A releasing zone, cross-zoned as type H, without at least one smoke detector and one heat detector mapped to the same releasing zone.

• A missing releasing input on cross-zoning function

• A missing different zone on releasing cross zone Z.

• A missing associated zone on releasing cross zoning.

Time Control (Z95, Z96)

• Do not program a time control function (Z95, Z96) as a releasing function.

• Do not program a heat detector to a time control zone (Z95, Z96).

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


69

Programming

3.3 Program Change Options

3.3.1 Overview

This section covers the following Program Change options:

Program Change Options

Topic

Clear programming memory

Autoprogram the control panel

Program a point for a:

• detector

• monitor module

• control or relay module

• panel circuit

Change a programming password (Program

Change or Status

Change)

Create or change the system message on the display

Create or change a custom zone label

Change the program for special Zones 90 through 99

Change system functions

Check the program for errors

Refer to

“How to Clear a Program from Memory (0=clr)” on page 73

“How to Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=auto)” on page 73

“How to Program an Intelligent Detector” on page 80

“How to Program a Monitor Module” on page 81

“How to a Program a Control or Relay Module” on page 83

“How to Program a Panel Circuit” on page 84

“How to Change a Programming Password (3=passwd)” on page 85

“How to Change a System Message (4=message)” on page 86

“How to Change a Zone Label (5=zones)” on page 86

“How to Edit a Special Zone (6=spl zones)” on page 87

“How to Edit System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89

“How to Check the Program (8=check)” on page 92

Table 15 Program Change Topics

70


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

How to Enter Program Change

Programming

3.4 How to Enter Program Change

To enter Program Change mode, follow these steps:

1. Press the

ENTER

key to enter programming mode and the LCD display shows the

Programming Entry screen:

1=PROGRAMMING

2=READ@STATUS@ENTRY


Figure 51 Programming Entry Screen

2. Press the

1

key and the following screen appears in the LCD display:




Figure 52 Password Entry Screen

3. Enter your Program Change password. The control panel enters Program Change.

The Program Change options appear in the LCD display as shown in Figure 53:

0=CLR@1=AUTO@2=POINT

3=PASSWD@4=MESSAGE

5=ZONES@6=SPL@ZONES

7=SYS@8=CHECK@PRG

The System Trouble LED remains flashing throughout all Program Change operations.

Figure 53 Program Change Screen

In Program Change, the control panel trouble relay activates—but the panel sounder does not activate, and the System Trouble LED flashes.

4. Select a Program Change option by pressing the numeric key (0-8) that matches the option. To exit Program Change and return to the Program Entry screen, press the

BACKSPACE

key.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


71

Programming


3.4.1 Program Change Map

Figure 54 shows a map of the Program Change options. For each option (0-8) the map shows the main screen, a reference to the section, and a brief overview of the option.

Programming Entry Screen

1=PROGRAMMING

2=READ@STATUS@ENTRY


2

0

1

Clear Screen

PRESS ENTER TO

CLEAR ENTIRE PROGRAM

OR

BACKSPACE TO ESCAPE

Autoprogram Screen

AUTOPROGRAM

PLEASE@WAIT

Point Programming Screen

[email protected]:

1 = MODIFY POINT

2 = DELETE POINT

Password Entry Screen




Program Change Screen

0=CLR@1=AUTO@2=POINT

3=PASSWD@4=MESSAGE

5=ZONES@6=SPL@ZONES

7=SYS@8=CHECK@PRG

For details, refer to “How to Clear a Program from Memory (0=clr)” on page 73

Confirm Screen

Clear existing program information from CPU memory

For details, refer to “How to

Autoprogram the Control Panel

(1=auto)” on page 73

For details, refer to “How to Edit or

Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78

Display New Device

Accept or reject new detectors and modules

Edit or Delete Point

Select an installed and programmed point to edit or delete

3

4

5

Password Change Screen

CHANGE@PASSWORD

*,NNNNN,E=PROGRAM

#,NNNNN,E=STATUS

AREA FOR NEW PASSWORD

For details, refer to “How to

Change a Programming Password

(3=passwd)” on page 85

Change Password

Change the Program or Status Change password

Message Change Screen

SYS@NORMAL@MESSAGE

For details, refer to “How to Change a

System Message (4=message)” on page

86

Edit Message

Edit the 40-character message that displays on the first two lines

Zone Change Screen

CHANGE@ZONE@LABEL

SELECT@ZONE@01-89:

ENTER@UP@TO@19@CHAR:

For details, refer to “How to Change a

Zone Label (5=zones)” on page 86

Edit Zone Label

Edit the 19-character custom zone label for zones 01-89

72

6

7

8

Special Zone Change Screen

SPECIAL@ZONE@PROGRAM

90=PRESIG@91-94=REL

95-96=TIME@97=HOL

98=CODING@99=PREALM

For details, refer to “How to Edit a Special

Zone (6=spl zones)” on page 87

Edit Zone Label

Program releasing zones and special zones

System Function Change Screen

SIL@INH=060@AUTO=600

VERIFY=30@@@USA@TIME

ANNUN=ACS(1+2)@@LocT

BLINK=Y@ST=4@AVPS=N

For details, refer to “How to Edit

System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89

Check Program Screen

PROGRAM CHECK OK.

RE-TEST PANEL NOW

05:31P MON 11/03/97

For details, refer to “How to Check the Program (8=check)” on page 92

Edit Zone Label

Program global system functions

Edit Zone Label

Check the new or current program for errors

Figure 54 Map of Program Change Options

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Program Change

Password

Programming

3.4.2 How to Clear a Program from Memory (0=

CLR

)

The Clear option erases all programming information from the CPU memory of the control panel. You typically use the Clear function to erase data from the control before autoprogramming the control panel for the first time or if you remove one or more devices from the system. For more information on removing devices, refer to “How to

Remove a Device from the Program” on page 76.

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53), press the

0

key. The Clear Program screen displays a verification prompt as shown in Figure 55:

PRESS ENTER TO

CLEAR ENTIRE PROGRAM

OR

BACKSPACE TO ESCAPE

Program Change

Password

!

Figure 55 Clear Program Screen

CAUTION: Pressing the

ENTER

key causes the system to erase all existing programming data from CPU memory.

2. To erase existing programming data, press the

ENTER

key. To exit and return to the

Program Change screen without erasing data, press the

BACKSPACE

key.

3.4.3 How to Autoprogram the Control Panel (1=

AUTO

)

Purpose

The Autoprogram option directs the control panel to identify all detectors and modules connected to the SLC. You can use the Autoprogram option to create a new program and add or delete addressable detectors and modules connected to the SLC. Table 16 contains a summary of the Autoprogram functions, when to use the functions, and where to find information on using the functions.

Autoprogram

Function

Create

for the control panel

Add

one or more

SLC-connected detectors and modules to an existing program

Remove

one or more

SLC-connected detectors and modules from an existing program

View

a new program

system defaults

Control Panel Configuration Refer to

A new control panel or a control panel with no existing program in memory.

A program exists in memory and you want to add a detector or module to the existing program—without modifying information for existing detectors and modules.

A program exists in memory and you want to remove an installed detector or module from the existing program—without modifying information for existing detectors and modules.

A program exists in memory and you want to view system settings assigned during autoprogram, such as custom labels, passwords, and so on.

“Create a New Program for the

Control Panel” on page 74

“How to Add a Device to the

Program” on page 75

“How to Remove a Device from the Program” on page 76

“How to Change Autoprogram

System Defaults” on page 77

Table 16 Autoprogram Functions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


73

Programming

Program Change

Password


Create a New Program for the Control Panel

This section covers how to use the Autoprogram option to create a new program for the control panel. The control panel will identify all addressable detectors and modules connected to the SLC then display default program information for each installed device.

Note: If your system includes a relay module, you must manually set this from

“control” to “relay” after completing autoprogram. Refer to “How to a Program a

Control or Relay Module” on page 83 for details.

To create a new program for the control panel, follow these steps:

1. Use the Clear option to clear program information from memory. For instructions on doing this, refer to “How to Clear a Program from Memory (0=clr)” on page 73.

2. From the Program Change screen, press the

1

key to start Autoprogram. The control panel scans the system to identify all detectors and modules connected to the SLC and displays the following screen:

AUTOPROGRAM

PLEASE@WAIT

Figure 56 Autoprogram Prompt

3. When finished identifying SLC devices, the LCD displays the first detector or module in the following order: detectors in address order (D01, D02, and so on), monitor modules in address order, and control or relay modules in address order.

For example, Figure 57 shows a sample screen for a new device identified by the control program during autoprogram.

Default label for the device. To edit, refer to “How to Edit or Delete a Point

(2=point)” on page 78.

Type Code for the device which you can only edit using the Point Programming option. For details, refer to “How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78.

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

DETECTOR@ADDRESS@01

ZO3@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@

2.0%@@@@@@*P*@@@@D01

Default Autoprogram information for the device.

To edit this information, refer to “How to Edit or

Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78 for instructions.

Device address

(detector at SLC address 01 shown)

Figure 57 Sample New Device Screen

74


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

4. When a New Device screen displays, you can take one of the following actions:

You can

Accept default program information for the device

Reject the device

Edit program information for the device

Do this

Press the

ENTER

key to save the default program information in memory for the device and display the next device.

Press the

BACKSPACE

key to reject the device (which prevents storing the device in memory) and display the next device.

Use the programming keypad to edit program information for the device. For instructions on editing program information, refer to

“How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78). When finished editing device information, press the

ENTER

key to save the program information in memory for the device and display the next device.

Table 17 Autoprogram Options for New Devices

5. Continue displaying and acting on each device. When the control panel completes displaying new devices, the Autoprogram Summary screen is displayed. The

Autoprogram Summary screen—see Figure 58—displays the total number of detectors, modules, and panel circuits connected to the control panel.

The number of panel circuits shown in the

Autoprogram Summary screen always equals

“04.”

DETECTORS :10

MODULES :02

PANEL CKTS :04

SLC devices

(detectors and modules) identified during Autoprogram

When using the Autoprogram option with an existing program, the control panel does not change program information for installed and programmed devices.

Figure 58 Sample Autoprogram Summary Screen

6. Press the

ENTER

key, then press the

BACKSPACE

key to save the program in memory and return to the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71);

or

Press the

BACKSPACE

key to exit without saving and return to the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71).

How to Add a Device to the Program

You can also use the Autoprogram option to add addressable detectors and modules to the existing control panel program.

The following steps describe how to add a new detector at SLC address 04 with

10 detectors in the existing program:

1. Install the addressable detector to the SLC at address 04 (for instructions, refer to

Section 2 “Installation”).


1

key to start autoprogram.

The Autoprogram Prompt screen (Figure 56 on page 74) appears in the LCD display as the control panel identifies addressable devices connected to the SLC.

3. When finished identifying SLC devices, the control panel displays information for the new detector at SLC address 04 on the LCD display as shown in Figure 59.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


75

Programming


Default label for the device. To edit, refer to “How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78.

Type Code for the device which you can only edit using the Point Programming option. For details, refer to “How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78.

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

DETECTOR@ADDRESS@01

ZO3@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@

2.0%@@@@@@*P*@@@@D04

Default Autoprogram information for the device. To edit this information, refer to “How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78 for instructions.

Device address (detector at

SLC address 04 shown)

Figure 59 Sample New Device Screen

4. Press the

ENTER

key to add detector 04 to the program with the default program information. If you want to change the default information, use the programming keys to do so, then press the

ENTER

key to add detector 04 to the program. To reject the new device, press the

BACKSPACE

key to return to the Program Change screen.

5. The Autoprogram Summary screen appears. You can verify addition of the detector to the program by noting the new count of detectors as shown in Figure 60.

DETECTORS :11

MODULES :02

PANEL CKTS :04

Note that the number of detectors increases

(from 10 to 11) to show the addition of the detector.

When using the Autoprogram option with an existing program, the control panel does not change program information for installed and programmed devices.


6. Press the

ENTER

key, then press the

BACKSPACE

key to save the program in memory and return to the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71).

How to Remove a Device from the Program

You can also use the Autoprogram option to remove addressable detectors and modules from the control panel program.

The following steps describe how to delete a detector at SLC address 04 with

10 detectors in the existing program:

1. Disconnect and remove the detector from the SLC at address 04.


1

key to start

Autoprogram. The Autoprogram Prompt screen (Figure 56 on page 74) while the control panel identifies addressable devices connected to the SLC.

3. When finished identifying SLC devices, the control panel displays a screen, indicating a missing detector at SLC address 04 as shown in Figure 61.

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

FLOOR1@MAIN@LOBBY

DEVICE@NOT@ANSWERING

DELETE@FROM@MEM?@D04

D04 – the address of the device removed from the SLC.

Figure 61 Sample Missing Device Screen

4. Press the

ENTER

key to delete detector 04 from the program and return to the

Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71).

76


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

The Autoprogram Summary screen appears. You can verify removal of the detector from the program by noting the new count of detectors as shown in Figure 60.

DETECTORS :10

MODULES :02

PANEL CKTS :04

Note that the number of detectors decreases (from 11 to

10) to show the removal of the detector.


5. Press the

ENTER

key, then press the

BACKSPACE

key to save the program in memory and return to the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71).

How to Change Autoprogram System Defaults

The Autoprogram option automatically selects default system functions during initial programming of the control panel. You can change the default system functions. If you change any system default, then autoprogram the control panel, any new system values that you enter, do not change. For example, if you change a Program Change password, install new devices, and run the Autoprogram option, the new Program Change password remains unchanged. Table 18 contains default system functions and value.

System Function

Zone 00

Zones 01 through 89

Zone 90

Zones 91-94

Zones 95 and 96

Zone 97

Zone 98

Zone 99

System Parameters

Programming Passwords

All Systems Normal Custom

Message

Default Value

Custom label =

GENERAL

Custom label is blank

ALARM

Custom message label = 40 blanks

ZONE

For more information, refer to

“How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78

“How to Change a Zone Label (5=zones)” on page 86

“Programming a Presignal Zone (Z90)” on page 87

Label =

PRESIGNAL

/

PAS DELAY

,

DELAY

=180,

PAS

=

N

Label =

RELEASE ZONE

91

DELAY

=00,

ABORT

-

ULI CROSS

=

N SOAK

=00

Label =

TIME CONTROL ZONE

96,

ON

=00:00,

OFF

=00:00,

DAYS

=

SMTWTFSH

Label =

HOLIDAY ZONE

97 , all days are

00/00

Label = all blanks,

CODE TYPE

=

MARCH

TIME

“Releasing Control Zones (Zones 91-94)” on page 88

“Time Control Change (Zones 95, 96)” on page 88

“Holiday Change (Zone 97)” on page 88

“Code Type (Zone 98)” on page 89

Label =

PRE

-

ALARM ZONE

99,

ALERT

=70%

OF ALARM

,

ACTION

=00%

OF

ALARM

“Pre-Alarm (Zone 99)” on page 89

“How to Edit System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89

SIL INH

=000,

AUTO

=000,

VERIFY

=00,

USA TIME

,

ANNUN

=

NON SUPV

, LocT

BLINK

=

Y

,

ST

=4,

AVPS

=

N

Program Change 00000

Status Change 11111

“Programming Passwords” on page 66

“How to Change a Programming Password

(3=passwd)” on page 85

“How to Change a System Message

(4=message)” on page 86

Table 18 Default Parameters for System Functions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


77

Programming

Program Change

Password


3.4.4 How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=

POINT

)

Purpose

A

point

is a detector or module connected to the SLC or a device connected to one of the four panel circuits. The Point Programming (Point) option lets you do the following:

• Modify program information for a detector, module, or panel circuit point

• Delete a detector or module point from the program

This section contains instructions using the Point Programming option to do the following tasks:

Task Covers the following

Refer to page

How to Select a Point to modify or delete a How to display a detector, module, or panel circuit point so you can modify or delete it

How to Program an Intelligent Detector a

How to modify program information for an addressable, intelligent detector

How to Program a Monitor Module a

How to a Program a Control or Relay

Module a

How to Program a Panel Circuit

How to modify program information for a monitor module

How to modify program information for a control or relay module

How to Delete a Detector or Module

Point b

How to modify program information for any of the four NAC or Panel

Circuits

How delete a detector or module point from the program

75

80

81

83

84

84 a. To do this task, the device must be installed and programmed using the Autoprogram option.

b. Deleting a point only deletes the point from program memory—not the device. For instructions on removing a device, refer to “How to Remove a Device from the

Program” on page 76.

Table 19 Point Programming Topics

How to Select a Point

To select a point, follow these steps:

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), press the

2

key (Point) to display the Point Programming Entry screen (Figure 64).

[email protected]:

1 = MODIFY POINT

2 = DELETE POINT

Figure 63 Point Programming Screen

78


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

2. From the Point Programming screen, press the

1

key to display the Modify Point

Selection screen or press the

2

key to display the Delete Point Selection screen

(Figure 64).

[email protected]:

DETECTOR=*,AA,E

MODULE=#,AA,E

BELLCKT=*#,A,E

Modify Point screen

DELETE POINT.ENTER:

DETECTOR=*,AA,E

MODULE=#,AA,E

Delete Point screen

Figure 64 Modify and Delete Point Selection Screen

3. From the Modify Point screen or the Delete Point screen, use the programming keys to display a device as shown in Table 20.

To Display a Do this Refer to

Detector monitor, relay, or control module

Press the * key, press the numeric keys that represent the detector SLC address

(01-99), then press the

ENTER

key.

Press the # key, press the numeric keys that represent the module SLC address

(01-99), then press the

ENTER

key.

• “How to Program an

Intelligent Detector” on page

80

or

• “How to Delete a Detector or

Module Point” on page 84

• “How to a Program a Control or Relay Module” on page 83

or

• “How to Program a Monitor

Module” on page 81

• “How to Delete a Detector or

Module Point” on page 84

“How to Program a Panel

Circuit” on page 84

Panel circuit Press the * key, press the # key, press the numeric key which represents the circuit address (01-04), then press the

ENTER key.

Notes

:

• If you enter the address of a detector or module that is not installed, the control panel displays the point with the next highest address.

• Press the

Up

arrow key to display the point at the previous address or press the

Down

arrow key to select the point at the next address.

• You cannot delete a panel circuit.

Table 20 How to Display a Point

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


79

Programming


How to Program an Intelligent Detector

You can change program information for an addressable detector that is installed and programmed using the Autoprogram option. Figure 65 shows a sample display for a programmed detector. If editing the detector while using the Point: Modify option, you can modify all fields as shown in Figure 65.

The default custom label

Type Code (For selections, refer to Table

21)

Z03 is the default zone selection (note 1)

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

DETECTOR@ADDRESS@01

ZO3@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@

2.0%@@@@@@*P*@@@@D01

2.0% obscuration per foot is the sensitivity setting. Ion detectors show HIGH, MED, or LOW (note 3)

Four additional zones for the device’s CBE (note 2).

*

Indicates drift compensation option not set (note 6)

*

Indicates Alarm Verification option not set

(note 5)

P

indicates that the AWACS™ Pre-Alarm function is operational. The default setting is

Alert level at 70% of alarm level. See note 4.

Figure 65 Typical Detector Point: Modify Screen

Notes for Figure 65:

1.

Default Zone Selection

Default zones are: Zone 01 (heat detectors), Zone 02

(ionization detectors), and Zone 03 (photo detectors).

2.

CBE selection

Four additional zones can be selected for the device’s CBE.

3.

Detector Sensitivity

If this is an FSI-751 ionization detector used in a duct application, the sensitivity must be set to HIGH. Refer to Section 4 “Operation” for details on selecting detector sensitivity.

4.

Pre-Alarm

To deselect Pre-Alarm, press the * key. For more information on selecting Pre-Alarm, refer to “Pre-Alarm (Zone 99)” on page 89 and Appendix G.

5.

Alarm Verification

Make sure to record detectors programmed for Alarm

Verification on the Protected Premises Label located inside the cabinet door. To select Alarm Verification, replace the * with the a “V”. For more information on

Alarm Verification, refer to Section 4 “Operation”.

6.

Drift Compensation

To select Drift Compensation, position the cursor over the first * and press the D (3) key. For more information on Drift Compensation, refer to Section 4 “Operation”

A Type Code defines the function of the detector. Table 21 contains a list of detector

Type Codes:

Type Code

SMOKE (ION)

SMOKE (PHOTO)

HEAT (ANALOG)

Detector Type

Ionization smoke detector (FSI-751)

Intelligent smoke detector (FSP-751)

Intelligent thermal detector (FST-751)

Table 21 Detector Type Codes

80


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

How to Program a Monitor Module

Figure 66 shows a sample display of a typical monitor module Point: Modify screen. If editing the module while using the Point: Modify option, you can modify all fields as shown in Figure 65.

Custom label for this device, which you can edit using the programming keys.

Type Code (For explanations, refer to Table 23)

PROGRM@MONITOR

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z04@Z@@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@ M08

Default zone selection is Z04.

See Table 22 for a list of default zone selections.

Four additional CBE selections

Two-digit address (01-99)

“M” (Module) identifies the type of device

Selection of a Type Code may change the functional operation of the monitor module point. For example, selecting the Type Code

“Tamper” can define the monitor module to indicate an alarm for a security application

Figure 66 Sample Monitor Module Programming Display

Edit any field in the LCD display by following these steps:

1. Move the blinking cursor with the right cursor key to the field you want to edit.

2. Change the blinking fields by pressing the up cursor key, or by pressing a numeric key.

The primary programming task for editing monitor modules is selecting the Type Code.

To do so, move the cursor to the Type Code field (the Type Code field blinks when selected). Select a Type Code by pressing the

up

cursor key until your Type Code selection appears (Table 23 contains a list of monitor module Type Codes).

You can change the default zone (listed in

Table 22

) and add up to four zones for the

CBE of each monitor module.

Table 22

contains the Autoprogram default zone selection for monitor modules

.

Monitor module Address Zone Default

01 through 19

20 through 39

40 through 59

60 through 79

80 through 99

Z04

Z05

Z06

Z07

Z08

Table 22 Monitor Module Default Zone Selection

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


81

Programming


Table 23 contains a list of monitor module Type Codes:

Type Code Special function when activated

MONITOR

(default)

Monitor module used to monitor normally open contact, shorting-type devices.

PULL STATION

NBG-12LX addressable manual pull station

SMOKE

DETECT

None

HEAT DETECT

None

Blank

WATERFLOW

None, select when no other Type Code applies.

Causes a non-silenceable alarm.

SUPERVISORY

TAMPER

NON FIRE

HAZARD

ALERT

FIRE

ABORT

SWITCH

CONTROL

Becomes a supervisory point (Refer to Section

4 “Operation”).

Becomes a supervisory point (Refer to Section

4 “Operation”).

A special non-alarm point used for energy management or other non-fire situations

(Refer to Section 4 “Operation”)

A special non-alarm point used for monitoring hazardous situations, such as a tornado

(Refer to Section 4 “Operation”).

A special non-alarm point used for air handler shutdown and are intended to override normal operating automatic functions (Refer to

Section 4 “Operation”).

Aborts activation of a releasing zone (Refer to

Appendix D “Releasing Applications.”)

MAN

.

RELEASE

SILENCE

Provide a manual release function and overrides the abort switch (Refer to Appendix

D “Releasing Applications.”)

Functions like the Alarm Silence switch.

SYSTEM

RESET

Functions like the System Reset switch.

EVACUATE

Functions like the Drill switch

PAS INHIBIT

TROUBLE

MON

Overrides a Presignal selection (Refer to

Appendix H “Special Zones.”)

Short = Trouble (Refer to Section 3

“Programming” & Section 4 “Operation”).

BURGLAR ALA

Causes Security Alarm on open or short

(Refer to Appendix E “Combination

Fire/Burglary Applications.”)

Nonlatching or Latching

latching

Activate

CBE?

yes latching latching latching latching latching latching latching nonlatching latching nonlatching nonlatching latching latching nonlatching latching nonlatching latching latching yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes no yes yes

Table 23 Monitor Module Type Codes

82


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

How to a Program a Control or Relay Module

A sample display of a typical control module Modify Point screen appears in Figure 67.

If editing the module while using the Modify Point option, you can modify all fields as shown in Figure 67.

Custom label for this device, which you can edit using the programming keys.


PROGRM@CONTROL

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z00@Z@@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@S*M08

Default zone selection is

Z00 (general alarm)

CBE selections

Silenceable (S) selected by default. (* = not selected).

Two-digit SLC address (01-99)

“M” (Module) prefix to device

SLC address

Walk Test (*) is not selected by default. (To select, change to “W”)

Figure 67 Sample Control or Relay Module Programming Screen

Press the

ENTER

key to accept default program information or press the

BACKSPACE

key to reject the default autoprogram information. Edit any field in the LCD display by following these steps:

1. Move the blinking cursor with the right cursor key to the field you want to edit.

2. Change blinking fields by pressing the up cursor key, or by pressing a numeric key.

Selection of control or relay module Type Code may change their function. Table 24 contains descriptions of the control or relay module Type Codes.

Type Code Label Special Function

CONTROL

None (default)

RELAY

Ignore open circuit

STROBE CKT

None

BELL

None

HORN CIRCUIT

None

AUDIBLE CKT

None

BLANK

None, select when no other Type Code applies

RELEASE CKT

Short = Normal (nonpower-limited, see Appendix D)

REL CKT ULC

Short = Trouble (supervised and power-limited, see Appendix D)

RELEASE FORM

_

C

Contacts operated upon release

Note: A releasing circuit is always non-silenceable.

Table 24 Control or Relay Module Type Codes

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


83

Programming


How to Program a Panel Circuit

Panel circuit program functions and Type Codes are similar to control modules, with the exception that they can not be used for agent release applications.

Because the four Panel Circuits are always installed, the autoprogram feature does not display Panel Circuits. Figure 68 shows a sample edit screen for Panel Circuit point programming:

Custom label for this device.


PROGRM@BELL@CIRCUIT

PANEL@CIRCUIT@NO.@1

Z00@Z@@@@Z@@@Z@@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@SW@BO1

Default zone selection is Z00 (general alarm)

CBE selections


“B” (bell circuit) in the address

Walk Test (W) is selected by default.

(* = not selected). For details on Walk

Test, refer to “How to do a Walk Test

(6=walk test)” on page 99.

Silenceable (S) is selected by default.

(* = not selected).

Figure 68 Sample Panel Circuit Edit Screen

To edit a Panel Circuit point select the Type Code. To do so, move the cursor to the

Type Code field (the Type code field will blink when selected). Select a Type Code by pressing the up key until your desired Type Code appears. Table 25 contains a list of the Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) Type Codes.

Table 25 contains Type Code selections for the four Notification Appliance Circuits:

Type Code Label

BELL CIRCUIT

STROBE CKT

HORN CIRCUIT

AUDIBLE CKT blank

Special Function

None (default)

None

None

None

Use when no other Type Code applies

Table 25 Notification Appliance Circuit Type Codes

How to Delete a Detector or Module Point

You can use the Delete Point option to temporarily delete an intelligent detector or module point from program memory. Selecting option 2 from the Point Programming screen (Figure 63) lets you choose a detector or module point to delete. Figure 69 shows the Delete Point Selection screen and contains instructions for accessing a point.

84


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

DELETE POINT.ENTER:

DETECTOR=*,AA,E

MODULE=#,AA,E

Instead of reentering the next point number or if you do not know the SLC address, you can press the up or down key to display the next lower or higher point.

Figure 69 Delete Point Selection Screen

From the Delete Point Selection screen, select a detector or module SLC address. If the selected point number is not installed, the control panel displays the next higher installed point.

Figure 70 shows a sample Delete Point screen for a smoke detector at SLC address 38:

NORMAL SMOKE (ION):

ENTER TO DELETE OR

BACKSPACE TO ABORT

00%/HIGH *P* D38

Program Change

Password

Figure 70 Sample Delete Point Screen

From the Delete Point screen, you can do the following:

• Press the

ENTER

key to delete the point and return to the Delete Point Selection screen;

or

• Press the left cursor (backspace) key to keep the point in memory and return to the

Delete Point Selection screen.

3.4.5 How to Change a Programming Password (3=

PASSWD

)

The Password Change function lets you enter the Program Change and Status Change passwords. A password must contain at least five numeric characters, no spaces allowed. To change a password, follow these steps:

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select option 3

(Password). The LCD display shows the Password Change screen (Figure 71).

To change the Program

Change password, press *, key in the new password, then press the

ENTER

key.

CHANGE@PASSWORD

*,NNNNN,E=PROGRAM

#,NNNNN,E=STATUS

AREA FOR NEW PASSWORD

To change the Status

Change password, press #, key in the new password, then press the

ENTER

key.

As the new Program Change or Status

Change password is entered it displays on the fourth line.

Figure 71 Password Change Screen

2. Follow the instructions in Figure 71. To return to the Program Change screen without changing the password, press the left cursor (backspace) key. When finished changing the password, press the

ENTER

key to return to the Program

Change screen.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


85

Programming

Program Change

Password


3.4.6 How to Change a System Message (4=

MESSAGE

)

The Message Change screen lets you change the 40-character “All Systems Normal” message.

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select option 4

(Message) to display the Message Change screen (Figure 72).

SYS@NORMAL@MESSAGE

For instructions on using the programming key, refer to

“How to Use the Programming

Keypad” on page 67.

Message entry area for entering up to 40 characters. Type a blank space in character position 20 or 21 so the words do not run together on an 80-character printer.

The first character on the third line blinks and may be changed to any alphabetic character by using the keypad, then pressing the right cursor to move to the next position.

Figure 72 Message Change Screen

2. Use the programming keypad to enter or edit the system message (up to

40 characters).

3. When finished entering characters, press the

ENTER

key to save the new message and return to the Program Change screen.

Program Change

Password

3.4.7 How to Change a Zone Label (5=

ZONES

)

The Zone Change function lets you add or modify a zone label. A zone label is a text entry that you can key in to describe a zone between 01–89. To change a zone label, follow these instructions:

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select option (5=Zones) to display the Change Zone Label screen. Figure 73 shows the Change Zone Label screen:

Line 2, character positions 19 and 20, for entering a zone number.

CHANGE@ZONE@LABEL

SELECT@ZONE@01-89:

ENTER@UP@TO@19@CHAR:

For instructions on using the programming keys, refer to

“How to Use the Programming

Keypad” on page 67.

Line 4 – display area for existing zone label.

Figure 73 Zone Change Label Screen

2. Select a zone to change by entering the zone number (01-89) in character positions

19 and 20 on the second line. For single-digit numbers, enter a leading zero before the digit (for example, enter “07” for zone 7).

3. The existing (if any) zone label displays on line 4 of the LCD display, characters 2 through 20. Character 1 on line 4 is blank to force a space between the device and zone labels when they are linked on the printer.

4. Add or change the zone label, then press the

ENTER

key. The zone label changes in memory and the LCD display returns to the Change Zone Label screen.

5. If the zone is out of range, the software ignores the

ENTER

key. To return to the

Program Change screen, press the

BACKSPACE

key.

86


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

3.4.8 How to Edit a Special Zone (6=

SPL ZONES

)

Purpose of Special Zones (90-99)

Special zones include ten special software zones that you can program to do the following:.

Program Change

Password

Special Zone

90

91-94

95, 96

97

98

99

Description

A software zone used to select Presignal options.

Four software zones used to control releasing applications.

Two software zones used to assign time control functions.

A software zone used to select holiday time controls.

A software zone used to select the type of coding for Panel Circuits.

A zone used to select the Pre-Alarm function.

Table 26 Special Software Zones 90-99

How to Select Special Zones

The Special Zone Change option you change the program for special Zones 90 through

99. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select

6=SPL ZONES

to display the Special Zone Change screen. Figure 74 shows the Special Zone Change screen:

SPECIAL@ZONE@PROGRAM

90=PRESIG@91-94=REL

95-96=TIME@97=HOL

98=CODING@99=PREALM

Figure 74 Special Zone Change Screen

From the Special Zone Change screen, you can select one of the options listed in Table

26. To select an option from the Special Zone Change screen, key in the number of the option. For example, to select the coding software zone, key in “98”; to select the releasing software zone 92, key in “92”. The following subsections show each screen that can be selected from the Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74).

Programming a Presignal Zone (Z90)

What is a Presignal Zone?

You can use Presignal zone 90 when you want to delay control points for human verification. If zone 90 is included in a control or relay module or Notification Appliance Circuit CBE list, it inhibits all other CBE. Detectors and monitor modules must call out Zone 90 in their program to be included in the pre-signal/PAS operation.

When any alarm occurs and no PAS inhibit type monitor module is activated, Zone 90 activates. If a second alarm activates, or the Drill switch is pressed, Zone 90 goes false.

If PAS is selected, and the Acknowledge switch is not pressed within 15 seconds, Zone

90 goes false. At the first alarm, a programmable 0–180 second timer starts. If an

Alarm Silence occurs, the timer stops. If the delay timer expires, manual activation will activate outputs mapped to zone F0. The System Alarm relay, the 4XTM Polarity

Reversal Alarm Output, and the 4XTM Municipal Box Output delay if PAS is selected, but do not delay for Presignal operations.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


87

Programming

88


From the Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74), key in “90” to display the Presignal screen. Figure 75 shows a typical Presignal screen.

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

PRESIGNAL@DELAY

DELAY=180

PAS=YES Z90

Figure 75 Presignal Screen

From the Presignal screen, you can change the delay time or the PAS selection. Refer to

Appendix H for a detailed explanation of Presignal and PAS.

Releasing Control Zones (Zones 91-94)

From the Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74), you can key in 91, 92, 93, or 94 to display the Release Control screen (Figure 76). You can change delay times

(0-60 seconds), abort type (ULI, IRI, NYC or AHJ), cross zoning (N,Y, H, or Z) or soak time (00, 10-15 minutes). Figure 76 shows a typical display:

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

RELEASE@@@CONTROL

DELAY=00@@ABORT=ULI

CROSS=Y@@@SOAK=00 Z91

Figure 76 Release Control Screen

For descriptions and options for releasing zones, refer to Appendix D “Releasing

Applications”

.

Time Control Change (Zones 95, 96)

Time Control lets you change the start time, stop time, or days of the week. From the

Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74), you can key in 95 or 96 to display the Time

Control Change screen. Figure 77 shows a typical screen for changing the time using software zone 95:

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

TIME@CONTROL

ON=08:00@@@OFF=17:00

DAYS=SMTWTFSH@@@@@@@Z95

Figure 77 Time Control Change Screen

For descriptions and options for Time Control zones, refer to Appendix H “Special

Zones”.

Holiday Change (Zone 97)

Software zone 97 (Holiday Change) lets you select up to nine holiday dates. Any device programmed to Software Zone 97 will be active on the holiday dates listed. From the

Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74), key in 97 to display the Holiday Change screen. Figure 78 shows a typical Holiday Change screen:

PRG@HOLIDAY@ZONE 97

01/01@@04/10@@05/26

07/04@@09/07@@11/26

11/27@@12/24@@12/25

Figure 78 Holiday Change Screen

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Programming

For descriptions and options for Holiday Zones, refer to Appendix H “Special Zones”.

Code Type (Zone 98)

Software zone 98 (code type), lets you select one of four code types: March Time,

Temporal, California, or Two Stage. Selection of coding only has an effect if one or more Notification Appliance Circuits call out zone 98. From the Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74), you key in 98, to display the Code Type screen. Figure 79 shows a sample Code Type screen with a code type of March Time.

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

CODE@TYPE:

MARCH@TIME

Z98

Figure 79 Code Type Screen

For descriptions and options for Code Types, refer to Appendix H “Special Zones”.

Pre-Alarm (Zone 99)

Use software zone 99 to program the Alert or Action Pre-Alarm. From the Special Zone

Change screen (Figure 74), enter 99 to display the Pre-Alarm screen. Figure 80 shows a sample Pre-Alarm screen.

PRG PRE-ALARM ZONE

ALERT=70% OF ALARM

ACTION=00% OF ALARM

Z99

Program Change

Password

Figure 80 Pre-Alarm Screen

For descriptions and options for Pre-Alarm, refer to Appendix G “Pre-Alarm

(AWACS™) Applications”.

3.4.9 How to Edit System Functions (7=

SYS

)

Purpose

You can select global settings for nine system functions, which appear in the System

Function Selection screen. Figure 81 shows a System Function Selection screen with default values in each system function field. The next section contains descriptions of each field and contains instructions for editing system functions.



ANNUN=NON SUPV@@REMT

BLINK=Y@ST=4@AVPS=N

Figure 81 System Function Default Values

Understanding System Functions

This section contains descriptions of the nine system functions, with the field name in parentheses, and the selections for each function.

SIL INH=

Lets you program a Silence Inhibit Timer that disables the Alarm

Silence switch function when a fire alarm occurs. You can enter a timer value between

0-300 seconds or enter 000 for no timer. The timer starts at the first alarm and restarts with each new alarm.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


89

Programming


An Alarm Verification Timer can reduce the amount of nuisance alarms caused by dirt and dust in a detector

AUTO=

Lets you program an Auto Silence Timer that functions like pressing the

Alarm Silence switch. For example, select 600. When the timer reaches 600 seconds (10 minutes), the control panel turns all active outputs that are programmed as silenceable.

VERIFY=

Lets you program an Alarm Verification timer that tells the control panel to ignore a smoke detector alarm while the timer is counting. (The control panel ignores the Alarm Verification Timer if it detects another alarm during the alarm verification period.) If the time elapses and a smoke detector alarm still exists, the control panel performs all standard functions. If the timer expires and a smoke detector alarm no longer exists, the control panel increments the verification counter (up to 99) for the device and returns to normal operation.

USA TIME

Lets you specify the format for system time and date that appears on the LCD display, terminal mode LCD-80s, and printouts. USA Time displays 12 hour clock with month/day/year. EUR displays a 24 hour clock with day/month/year and changes

TROUBL

to

FAULT

, and

DISABL

to

ISOLAT

in the Display Status field.

ANNUN=

The Annunciation field lets you select the type of remote annunciation:

No Supv, LCD-80, ACS Addr 1, ACS (1+2), or UDACT. Table 27 contains descriptions of each type:

You cannot program an

AVPS-24 or APS-6R for a combination Fire/Burglary application because the

AVPS-24 Trouble input is also used to monitor the door tamper switch.

Selection

NO SUPV

(default)

LCD 80 (T)

Specifies

Terminal mode on; no annunciation used.

ACS ADDR 1

ACS (1+2)

UDACT

Select terminal mode interface (TB5 on the CPU; set SW2 to TERM) to annunciate all point information to a remote LCD-80.

Select ACS mode (TB5 on the CPU; set SW2 to ACS) to communicate with

ACS mode devices, on Annunciator Address 1, which displays software zones

1-64

EIA-485 port (TB5 on CPU-200) programmed for point annunciation (SW2 set to ACS) to communicate with ACS mode devices, on Annunciator Address 1, which displays the eight system points and software zones 1-64 and

Annunciator Address 2, which displays software zones 57-99.

Annunciate panel status to a UDACT which is connected and programmed to the control panel.

Table 27 Annunciation Selections

AVPS=

You can program the control panel to supervise an installed AVPS-24 or

APS-6R expansion power supply. For details on programming and installation of an

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R, refer to Appendix J “Expansion Power Supplies”

.

Blink=

You can program the blink function of SLC-connected device LEDs during normal operation (selecting “Y” means devices blink and selecting “N” means devices do not blink). An SLC-addressable detector only blinks when the detector is tested (every three to four hours) but does not blink each time the control panel polls the detector.

ST=

You can specify the wiring style used on the SLC: Style 4 (default) or Style 6 operation. Wiring and programming the SLC for Style 6 and a single fault occurs, the control panel detects a fault and drives both ends of the line, fully recovering from the fault. The control panel latches the trouble and displays the trouble until System Reset.

Style 7 operation is the same as Style 6—but requires using ISO-X modules for isolating faults.

LocT

You can specify the operating mode for a computer or terminal connected through the EIA-232 port (TB4) on the control panel. For detailed information configuring the control panel with a computer or terminal, refer to Appendix I

“Terminal Interface Protocol”. Table 28 lists the operating mode selections.

90


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

Selection Specifies

LocT (default)

LocM

RemT

A local CRT terminal or computer in the same room as the control panel that provides Read Status, Alter Status, Acknowledge, Silence, Drill, and

System Reset functions.

Functions in the same manner as LocT except that it requires a password to execute the Acknowledge, Silence, Drill, and System Reset functions.

A remote terminal located away from the control panel that only allows the user to execute the Read Status function.

Table 28 EIA-232 Operating Mode Selections

How To Edit System Functions

This section contains instructions for editing system function fields. To do so, follow these steps:

1. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select

7=SYSTEM

to display the System Function screen. Figure 82 shows a System Function screen with default system values.

2. Edit the system function values as shown in Figure 82. For additional information on each value, refer to “Understanding System Functions” on page 89.

3. When finished editing, press the

ENTER

key to return to the Program Change screen.

Verify=

To change, enter a timer value as follows: 0–30 seconds (for systems with Release 1.2 software or higher) or 0 to 60 seconds (only permitted in systems with Release 1.0 and 1.1 software)

ANNUN=

To change, press the

Up

or

(See Table 27 on page 90).

Down

key to scroll through the selections

Sil Inh=000

To change the timer value, enter a timer value between 000–300 seconds.

Auto=

To change the timer value, enter 000 none

(default) or 600–900 seconds.



ANNUN=NONE SUPV@@LOCT

BLINK=Y@ST=4@AVPS=N

USA TIME (default)

To switch the value between

USA and EUR, press the

Up

or

Down

key.

LocT

(default)

To change, press the

Up

or

Down

key to scroll through the selections: LocT, LocM, or RemT.

BLINK=Y

To change the value between Y and

N, press the

Up

or

Down

key.

AVPS=4

press the

(or APS-6R)

To switch the value between Y and N,

Up

or

Down

key.

ST=4

To switch the value between ST=4 and ST=6, press the

Up

or

Down

key.

Figure 82 Editing System Functions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


91

Programming

Program Change

Password

Status Change Options

3.4.10 How to Check the Program (8=

CHECK

)

When finished programming the control panel, use the Check option to search program entries for possible errors. From the Program Change screen (Figure 53 on page 71), select option 8, (Check). The control panel software searches the program for the following conditions:

• Output points mapped to a zone with no inputs mapped.

• A zone with programmed input point(s) without programmed output point(s), including Z00 (general alarm) outputs.

• Releasing zone inputs (91, 92, 93, and 94) with no

RELEASE CKT

outputs programmed to them; or

RELEASE CKT

outputs with no releasing zone (91-94) inputs programmed to them.

•

RELEASE CKT

inputs not mapped to

MAN RELEASE

.

If multiple devices fail the check, use the up or down keys to step through the devices.

To correct any errors detected by the Check routine, return to point programming and correct the program errors.

Figure 83 shows a sample screen that appears when the system successfully completes a Program Check.

PROGRAM CHECK OK.

RE-TEST PANEL NOW

05:31P MON 11/03/97

Figure 83 Program Check Screen

3.5 Status Change Options

Even though control program parameters may display in

Status Change, the operator cannot access functions that affect basic operation of the control panel.

3.5.1 Overview

Status Change provides a second set of options accessed using the Status Change password (“Programming Passwords” on page 66). The Status Change options only allow change of operating parameters (listed in Table 29) that do not affect the basic configuration or control program. For instance, assign the Status Change password to persons who do not need to program applications or use the Autoprogram option.

This section covers the following Status Change topics:

Topic

Disable or enable a detector, module, or Panel

Circuit point.

Change detector sensitivity for an intelligent photo or ion detector

Clear verification counters used with the Alarm

Verification feature

Clear history from memory

Set system time and date

Walk test the system

Refer to

“How to Disable or Enable a Point (1=disable)” on page 95

“How to Set Detector Selections (2=sens/comp)” on page 96

“How to Clear Alarm Verification Counters (3=clr ver)” on page 97

“How to Clear the History Buffer (4=clr hist)” on page 98

“How to Set the System Time and Date (5=time)” on page 98

“How to do a Walk Test (6=walk test)” on page 99

Table 29 Status Change Topics

92


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Programming

For more information on programming passwords, refer to “Programming Passwords” on page 66.

3.5.2 Entering Status Change

You access all Status Change options from the Status Change screen (Figure 84). From the Program Entry screen (Figure 48 on page 66), enter your Status Change password to display the Status Change screen (Figure 84).

STATUS@CHANGE@PRESS:

1=DISABLE@2=SENS/COMP

3=CLR@VER@4=CLR@HIST

5=TIME@6=WALK@TEST

Figure 84 Status Change Screen

Status Change operations (except for Walk Test) have a two-minute timer. (The Walk

Test feature has a 1-hour timer.) If no keys are pressed for two minutes, the control panel exits Status Change and returns to normal operation.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


93

Programming


3.5.3 Status Change Programming Map

Figure 85 shows a map of the Status Change programming options. For each programming option (1-6) the map shows the main screen, a reference to the section with the instructions, and a brief overview of the option

Programming Entry Screen

1=PROGRAMMING

2=READ@STATUS@ENTRY


1

2

Password Entry Screen




Program Change Screen

STATUS@CHANGE@PRESS:

1=DISABLE@2=SENS/COMP

3=CLR@VER@4=CLR@HIST

5=TIME@6=WALK@TEST

Disable Screen

DISABLE/ENABLE

DETECTOR=*,AA,E

MODULE=#,AA,E

BELL@CKT=*#,AA,E

For details, refer to “How to Disable or

Enable a Point (1=disable)” on page 95

Disable or Enable a point or press the

BACKSPACE

key to exit.

Detector Sens/Comp Screen

DET.@SENS/COMP

ENTER@POINTS:@AA,E

For details, refer to “How to Set Detector

Selections (2=sens/comp)” on page 96

Make detector sensitivity, drift comp. selections or press the

BACKSPACE

key to exit.

3

4

5

Clear Verification Screen

PRESS@ENTER@TO@CLEAR

VERIFICATION COUNTS

OR@BACKSPACE@TO

ESCAPE

For details, refer to

“How to Clear Alarm Verification Counters

(3=clr ver)” on page 97

Press the

ENTER

key to clear or the

BACKSPACE

key to exit.

Clear History Screen


HISTORY@FILE

OR@BACKSPACE@TO

ESCAPE

For details, refer to “How to Clear the

History Buffer (4=clr hist)” on page 98

Press the

ENTER

key to clear or the

BACKSPACE

key to exit.

Time and Date Screen

CHANGE@TIME/DATE

09:45A@MON@10/31/97

For details, refer to

“How to Set the System Time and

Date (5=time)” on page 98

Edit the system time and date or press the

BACKSPACE

key to exit.

6

Walk Test Screen

WALK@TEST@PRESS

ENTER@TO@START

BACKSPACE@TO@STOP

For details, refer to “How to do a Walk

Test (6=walk test)” on page 99

Press the

ENTER

key, test the system. Press the

BACKSPACE

key to stop.

Figure 85 Map of Status Change Programming Options

94


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Status Change

Password

Programming

3.5.4 How to Disable or Enable a Point (1=

DISABLE

)

!!

WARNING:

Disable is a software function.

Do not use as a lockout in releasing applications.

The Disable/Enable option lets you disable or enable a programmed SLC point or panel circuit—except for an initiating device in alarm or a output/control point that is on. To disable or enable a programmed point or panel circuit, follow these instructions:

1. From the Status Change screen (Figure 84 on page 93), press the

1

key to display the Disable/Enable screen as shown in Figure 86.

To select a

module

: a) press the # key, press the numeric keys that represent the module

SLC address (01-99), then press the

ENTER key.

To select a

detector

: a) press the * key, press the numeric keys that represent the detector SLC address (01-99), then press the

ENTER

key.

DISABLE/ENABLE

DETECTOR=*,AA,E

MODULE=#,AA,E

BELL@CKT=*#,A,E

To select a

panel circuit

: a) press the * key, press the # key, then enter the address of the panel circuit

(1, 2, 3, or 4), then press the

ENTER

key.

Figure 86 Disable/Enable Screen

2. Enter the type of point to be disabled or enabled (* for detectors, # for modules, or

* and # for panel circuits), enter the two-digit SLC address of the point or the panel circuit number; then press the

ENTER

key. The control panel displays an edit screen for the point. For example, Figure 87 shows an edit screen for the NAC at address

B01.

Blinking status banner showing the current ENABLE/DISABL selection.

ENABLE BELL CIRCUIT

PANEL CIRCUIT NO. 1

Z00 Z Z Z Z

SW B01

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

For explanations of lines 3 and 4, refer to Figure 63 on page 78.

Figure 87 Sample Edit Screen for Disabling or Enabling a Point

3. Toggle the status banner to

DISABL

or

ENABLE

by pressing the

up

or

down

key.

4. When finished selecting the Enable/Disable status banner, press the

ENTER

key.

The control panel updates memory to the selected status and returns to the

Disable/Enable screen (Figure 86).

5. To continue with the Enable/Disable option, you can select another point. Do so by entering a new point number or pressing the

up

key to go to the next address point, or press the

down

key to go to the previous address point.

6. When finished selecting Enable/Disable selections, press the

BACKSPACE

key to return to the Status Change screen (Figure 84 on page 93).

95


Programming

Status Change

Password


3.5.5 How to Set Detector Selections (2=

SENS

/

COMP

)

Purpose

The Sens/Comp option lets you select detector sensitivity and drift compensation for photoelectric and ionization detectors.

You can select drift compensation for any intelligent detector on the SLC. Drift compensation provides accurate and stable readings of smoke, counteracting long-term drift caused by dust contamination and other long-term environmental factors. Drift compensation quickly detects true fires, rejects false signals—while allowing a detector to remain within performance specifications throughout its life span. Table 30 lists the three drift compensation measurements performed for each ionization or photoelectric detector.

Feature

long-term measurement of location’s clear air alarm test level measurement current chamber reading

Description

An average reading which adjusts to gradual buildup of dust contamination, unaffected by true smoke, even from smoldering fires.

A periodic detector test that commands each detector to simulate an alarm level reading from the sensing chamber.

Under normal conditions, this reading is close to the stored air clear value. If smoke occurs, the reading moves toward the alarm test level.

Table 30 Drift Compensation Measurement

The control panel converts the present reading to percent per foot obscuration or percent of alarm, based on its position between the known clean air and test values. The accuracy of this measurement method is sufficient to meet the NFPA 72 requirements as a calibrated smoke test instrument.

What are Detector Sensitivity Selections?

You can set the sensitivity level for an ionization or a photoelectric detector. Table 31 contains a list of UL-approved detector sensitivity settings for intelligent detectors.

Type of Detector

Ionization (FSI series)

Photoelectric (FSP series)

Sensitivity Selection

H

(high)

M

(medium), or

L

(low)

Note: If using older (DH500 series) ionization detectors for duct applications, set the detector sensitivity to “H”.

2.0

,

1.5

, of

1.0

percent obscuration per foot

Table 31 Ionization and Photoelectric Detector Sensitivity Selections

How to Select Detector Sensitivity and Drift Compensation

To change detector sensitivity, drift compensation both, follow these steps:


2

key to display the Detector Sensitivity/Comp screen (Figure 88).

DET.@SENS/COMP

ENTER@POINTS:@AA,E

96

Figure 88 Detector Sensitivity/Comp Screen

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



Programming

If you enter an address for an analog heat detector (FST) or other invalid address, the LCD display returns to Detector

Sensitivity/Comp screen.

2. Enter a valid detector SLC address and the control panel displays information for the detector on a screen similar to sample screen shown in Figure 89 with the current detector sensitivity selection blinking.

NORMAL SMOKE (ION)

DETECTOR ADDRESS 30

Z02 Z Z Z ZZ

HIGH *P* D30

To exit the screen and return to the Detector

Sensitivity/Comp screen, press the BACKSPACE key from the Detector Sensitivity selection.

Drift compensation

selection (

*

indicates option not set;

D

indicates drift compensation set).For details on drift compensation, “How to Set Detector Selections (2=sens/comp)” on page 96.

Detector sensitivity

selection (for a list of detector selections, see Table 31).

Figure 89 Sample Screen for Changing Detector Selections

3. To change the

detector sensitivity

, move the cursor to the current detector selection. Press the

Up

or

Down

key to change the detector sensitivity. For selections, see Table 31 on page 96.

4. To enable or disable

drift compensation

, move the cursor to the drift compensation selection. Press the

Up

or

Down

key to toggle the detector sensitivity between

D

(enabled) or

*

(disabled).

5. When finished making selections, press the

ENTER

key to return to the Detector

Sensitivity/Comp screen.

6. To change selections for another detector, press the

up

key to display the installed detector at the next highest SLC address or press the

down

key to display the installed detector at the next lowest SLC address.

3.5.6 How to Clear Alarm Verification Counters (3=

CLR VER

)

Purpose

The control panel provides a verification counter for each photoelectric and ionization detector programmed for Alarm Verification. (Alarm Verification time is a global program selection, covered in “How to Edit System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89.)

The verification counter displays the number of times that a detector entered Alarm

Verification but did not time out to alarm. The verification counter increments to 99 and holds. For instructions on viewing the verification counter, refer to 4.9 “Read Status”.

Clearing the Alarm Verification Counters

The Clear Verification Count screen (Figure 90) lets you clear all verification counters for detectors selected for Alarm Verification. To clear all verification counters, follow these steps:


3

key to display the Verification Count Clear screen as shown in Figure 90:

Status Change

Password PRESS@ENTER@TO@CLEAR

VERIFICATION COUNTS

OR@BACKSPACE@TO

ESCAPE

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Figure 90 Verification Count Clear Screen

2. Press the

ENTER

key to clear the verification counters or press the

BACKSPACE

key to return to the Status Change screen (Figure 84) without clearing the verification

97


Programming

Status Change

Password

Status Change

Password


counters.

3.5.7 How to Clear the History Buffer (4=

CLR HIST

)

Purpose

The History buffer is an electronic record of the last 650 events recorded by the control panel. Events in the History buffer include all alarms, troubles, and operator actions, such as Acknowledge, System Reset, Signal Silence, Manual Evacuate (Drill), and

Walk Test. The control panel also records each programming entry, which includes a number indicating the programming submenu (0-9). All events are time and date stamped. For information on reading or printing the History buffer, refer to 4.9.5

“Using the History Buffer”.

Clearing the History Buffer

The Clear History option lets you clear the entire contents of the History buffer from the control panel memory. For more details on the History buffer, refer to Section 4

“Operation”.


4

key to display the Clear History as shown in Figure 91.


HISTORY@FILE

OR@BACKSPACE@TO

ESCAPE

Figure 91 Clear History Screen

2. Press the

ENTER

key to clear the contents of the History buffer or press the

BACKSPACE

key to return to the Status Change screen (Figure 84) without clearing.

3.5.8 How to Set the System Time and Date (5=

TIME

)

Purpose

The Change Time and Date option lets you set the system time and date, which also appears on the LCD display. For instructions on selecting the time and date format

(USA or European), refer to “How to Edit System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89.

Setting the System Time and Date

To set the system time and date, follow these instructions:


5

key to display the Time and Date screen. Figure 92 shows a sample Time and Date screen:

CHANGE@TIME/DATE

09:45A@MON@10/31/97

The first digit of the hours flashes. Change digits by keying in digits with the programming keys. Pressing the right cursor moves to the next digit, and so on.

Figure 92 Time and Date Screen (USA time format shown)

2. Use the programming keypad to change the time and date, using the cursor keys to move the cursor as needed.

3. When finished entering the time and date, press the

ENTER

key to change the time and date in system memory and return to the Status Change screen.

98


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


!

Programming

3.5.9 How to do a Walk Test (6=

WALK TEST

)

WARNING: A Walk Test can deactivate fire protection. When conducting a Walk

Test, make sure to do the following:

• Secure all protected buildings, and notify the building owner/operator, fire department, and other persons that testing of the system is in progress.

• When finished doing a Walk Test, exit Walk Test immediately and return the system to normal operation.

• Notify the building owner/operator, fire department, and other persons that testing is complete and the system is operating normally.

Purpose

The Walk Test option lets one person test the entire system without returning to the control panel. Typically, you do a Walk Test by activating a set of devices in a planned sequence. When you finish a Walk Test, you can compare the History buffer against the planned test sequence.

There are two types of Walk Test, Standard and Silent, which are determined by the way the outputs are programmed:

• A Standard Walk Test is a test that sounds each output programmed for Walk Test for 3 seconds. Program outputs for Walk Test.

• A Silent Walk Test is a test that sends test information to a printer but does not sound outputs. Do not program any outputs for Walk Test.

Figure 93 shows a sample programming screen with a control module selected for a

Standard Walk Test. For more information on selecting outputs for Walk Test, refer to

“How to a Program a Control or Relay Module” on page 83 or “How to Program a

Panel Circuit” on page 84.

PROGRM@CONTROL

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z00@Z@@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@SW M08

Walk Test selected for the module.

(To select for Silent Walk Test, change the “W” to an asterisk (*)

Figure 93 Sample Control Module Programmed for Silent Walk Test

The Control Panel in Walk Test

When in Walk Test, the control panel does the following:

• Accepts each new alarm and activates its programmed outputs for approximately

3 seconds. For details on programming points for Walk Test activation, refer to

“How to Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78).

• Saves and stores each test in the History buffer.

• Sends a TEST Axx (xx is the number of tests for a detector with this SLC address) status banner for each alarm to the printer.

The “TEST Axx” message may be used to find installation errors. After walk-testing the entire system and setting each device into alarm once, if two devices are set to the same SLC address, a “TEST 02” will be reported for that SLC address. The installer should verify that no “TEST 02” or higher entries exist in the

History buffer.

• Turns on the System Trouble LED and the System Trouble relay. If a new trouble occurs, all control modules programmed for Walk Test activate for 8 seconds and

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


99

Programming

Status Change

Password


the control panel sends a trouble banner (“TEST Txx”) to the History buffer and optional printer.

• Turns off the System Alarm relay.

Doing a Walk Test

This section contains instructions for performing a Standard and Silent Walk Test.

Follow these procedures for doing both types of Walk Test. The difference between a

Standard and Silent Walk Test is the programming of the outputs as shown in“How to

Edit or Delete a Point (2=point)” on page 78.

To do a Standard Walk Test, follow these steps:


6

key to display the Walk Test Entry screen as shown in Figure 94:

WALK@TEST@PRESS

ENTER@TO@START

BACKSPACE@TO@STOP

To stop Walk Test at any time, press the BACKSPACE key and the control panel returns to the Status Change screen.

A 1-hour timer automatically returns the control panel to normal operation after 1 hour of inactivity.

Figure 94 Walk Test Entry Screen

2. From the Walk Test Entry screen, press the

ENTER key. The control panel goes into

Walk Test and the Walk Test screen appears as shown in Figure 95:

Second line goes blank in Walk Test

WALK@TEST@PRESS

BACKSPACE@TO@STOP

Figure 95 The LCD Display in Walk Test

3. Test your output devices.

4. When finished with the Walk Test, press the

BACKSPACE key to return the control panel to normal operation as shown in the sample screen in Figure 96.

ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL

11:13A@@SUN@12/25/97

!

Figure 96 Sample LCD Display in Normal Operation

5. View the History buffer and printer output (if installed) to check the results of the

Walk Test.

WARNING: When finished doing a Walk Test:

• Exit Walk Test immediately and return the system to normal operation.

• Notify the building owner/operator, fire department, and other persons that testing is complete and the system is operating normally.

100


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Overview

Operation

Section 4 Operation

4.1 Overview

This section provides information for operating the control panel, divided into the main sections that are listed in Table 32.

Section

The Membrane

Panel

How to Operate the Control Panel

Topic(s) covered

How to Use the Programming Keypad

How to Use the Enter Key and Cursor Keys

How to Use the Operator Keys

How to Read System Status LED Indicators

How to Operate the Panel in Normal Operation

How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Condition

How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Monitor Point

How to Operate a Panel with a Fire Alarm

How to Operate a Panel with a Supervisory Condition

How to Operate a Panel with a Non-Alarm Condition

How to Operate the Panel with an Output Circuit Trouble

Control-By-Event Operation Control-By-Event

Operation

Releasing

Functions

Time Functions

Read Status

Releasing Functions

Time Functions

Read Status

Table 32 Operation Topics

Refer to page

102

103

103

105

107

107

109

109

110

111

111

112

113

116

118

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


101

Operation

The Membrane Panel

4.2 The Membrane Panel

4.2.1 Overview

Figure 97 shows the Membrane Panel, which contains the Programming Keypad, the

Enter and Cursor keys, the Operator Keys, and the System Status LED Indicators.

Programming

Keypad

Enter and Cursor keys

1

J K L

5

M N O

6

P R S

7

Q

Z

T U V

8

DET

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM

RESET

Membrne

Operator Keys (4)

System Status

LED Indicators (6)

Figure 97 The Membrane Panel

4.2.2 How to Use the Programming Keypad

The programming keypad lets you enter numeric and alphabetic characters. Entering alphabetic characters is necessary for functions such as entering custom labels and system messages. Figure 98 contains an illustration of the Programming Keypad.

1

G H I

4

DET

J K L

5

P R S

7

T U V

8

Q

Z

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

Membrne

Programming

Keypad

1

J K L

5

M N O

6

P R S

7

Q

Z

T U V

8

DET

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

Figure 98 Programming Keypad

To learn how to enter alphanumeric characters on the Programming Keypad, “How to

Use the Programming Keypad” on page 67.

102


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Operation

4.2.3 How to Use the Enter Key and Cursor Keys

The Enter key and Cursor keys provide key functions such as: the cursor movement, scrolling, and backspace. Figure 99 contains an illustration of the Programming

Keypad.

Up Cursor key

1

G H I

4

A B C

2

D E F

3

P R S

7

J K L

5

M N O

6

T U V

8

W X Y

9

Q Z

DET MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM

RESET

Membrne

Enter key and

Cursor keys

Enter key

ENTER

Right Cursor key

Left Cursor

(Backspace) key

Down Cursor key

Figure 99 Enter Key and Cursor Keys

The Enter keys and Cursor keys can perform different functions, depending on the type of operation involved. Table 33 lists functions of the Enter key and the Cursor keys, with the alternate function of the cursor key in parentheses.

Key Functions

Enter

Left Cursor

(backspace)

• When the control panel is in normal operation, press the Enter key to display the Programming Entry screen (Figure 112 on page 119).

• Use to complete a programming function, such as entering data, to save data to memory and return to a previous screen.

The left cursor key can do the following:

• Move the cursor – Press to move the blinking cursor one place to the left.

• Backspace – Press to return to a previous screen.

Up Cursor (scroll up) • Press to move the blinking cursor up one line; or

• Press to step back through a list of choices, such as selecting a type code during point programming.

Press to move the blinking cursor one place to the right.

Right Cursor

Down Cursor

(scroll down)

• Press to move the blinking cursor down one line; or

• Scroll – Press to step forward through a list of choices, such as selecting a type code during point programming.

Table 33 Functions of the Enter Key and Cursor Keys

4.2.4 How to Use the Operator Keys

The Membrane Panel (see Figure 97 on page 102) contains four Operator Keys:

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

,

ALARM SILENCE

,

DRILL

, and

SYSTEM RESET

. This section provides the purpose and operation of each operator key.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


103

Operation


Acknowledge/Step

If multiple alarms, troubles, and supervisory signals exist, pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP key will silence all signals. This is called a “block acknowledge”

Purpose.

Pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key silences the panel sounder and changes all flashing alarm, trouble, and supervisory LEDs to steady.

Operation

Press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key once, no matter how many new alarm, trouble, or supervisory signals exist. If the panel sounder is silenced, the control panel sends an acknowledge message to the History buffer and any printers installed.

Pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key also automatically sends a command to silence the sounders on installed Terminal Mode LCD-80s and installed ACS annunciators.

Use the

STEP

function if more than one event exists as follows:

1. Press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key to step the LCD display to the next event. The control panel displays the event for 20 seconds or until the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP key is pressed again.

2. Continue pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key to step through each event.

Alarm Silence

A subsequent new alarm will resound the system.

Purpose

Press the

ALARM SILENCE

key to turn off all silenceable circuits and audio visual devices connected to NAC/Panel Circuits when an alarm sounds.

Operation

Pressing the

ALARM SILENCE

key does the following:

• Silences the panel sounder

• Lights the

ALARM SILENCE

LED

• Turns off all silenceable audio and visual devices (such as bells and horns) connected to NAC/Panel Circuits

• Sends an Alarm Silenced message to the History buffer, installed Terminal Mode

LCD-80s, and installed printers

Drill

Purpose

Press the

DRILL

key to manually test notification appliances.

Operation

Press the

DRILL

key for at least two seconds (to prevent accidental activations), to activate notification appliances. The control panel does the following:

• Turns on all silenceable circuits (all control modules and NAC/Panel Circuits programmed as silenceable)

• Turns off the

ALARM SILENCE

LED

• Sends a “Manual Evacuate” message to the LCD display, the History buffer, installed Terminal Mode LCD-80s, and installed printers

104


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


System Reset

Operation

Purpose

Press the

SYSTEM RESET

key to reset the control panel to normal operation (refer to “How to Operate the Panel in Normal Operation” on page 107).

Operation

Pressing the

SYSTEM RESET

key resets the control panel by doing the following:

• Turns off all alarm-activated control or relay modules and NAC/Panel Circuits;

• Breaks resettable power to four-wire detectors;

• Sends an “All Systems Normal” message to the LCD display, History buffer, installed Terminal Mode LCD-80s, and installed printers; and

• Turns on all LEDs, the panel sounder, and LCD display segments for as long as the

SYSTEM RESET

key is held (lamp test).

Note: Any alarm or trouble that exists after System Reset will resound the system.

4.2.5 How to Read System Status LED Indicators

The Membrane Switch Panel (see Figure 97 on page 102) contains six System Status

LED Indicators. The following provides the functions of each LED, the conditions that cause each LED to light (steady and flashing), and how to turn off each LED.

AC Power

Function

The

AC P

OWER

green LED lights

steady

if AC power is applied to the control panel.

When it lights

When you apply AC power to the control panel.

To turn off

Disconnect AC power to the control panel.

Fire Alarm

Function

The

FIRE ALARM

LED indicates the non-acknowledged fire alarm exists in the system.

When it lights

The

FIRE ALARM

LED

flashes

when one or more non-acknowledged fire alarms occur. The

FIRE

A

LARM

LED lights

steady

when you press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key.

To turn off

Press the

SYSTEM RESET

key.

Pre-Alarm Warning

Function

The

PRE

-

ALARM WARNING

LED indicates that a programmed Pre-Alarm level is reached. For details on Pre-Alarm, refer to Appendix G “Pre-Alarm

(AWACS™) Applications”.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


105

Operation

How to Operate the Control Panel

When it lights

The

PRE

-

ALARM WARNING

yellow LED

flashes

when a non-acknowledged fire Pre-Alarm threshold is reached. The LCD display indicates if it is an Alert or Action Pre-Alarm.

To turn off

To turn off the

PRE

-

ALARM WARNING

LED, clear the pre-alarm condition. Clearing an Action Pre-Alarm requires a system reset.

Supervisory Security

Function

The

SUPERVISORY SECURITY

LED indicates one or more security conditions in a combination fire/security protective signaling application. (For more details on security applications, refer to Appendix E.)

When it lights

The


yellow LED

flashes

when one or more non-acknowledged supervisory alarm (such as a sprinkler valve tamper condition) occurs. The


LED also lights

steady

when you press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key.

To turn off

Press the

SYSTEM RESET

key.

Alarm Silence

Function

The

ALARM SILENCE

LED indicates that the

ALARM SILENCE

key is pressed.

When it lights

The

ALARM SILENCE

yellow LED lights

steady

when an alarm condition occurs

and

the

ALARM SILENCE

key is pressed.

To turn off

The

ALARM SILENCE

LED turns off when you press the

DRILL

key or the

SYSTEM RESET

key.

System Trouble

Function

The

SYSTEM TROUBLE

LED indicates one or more trouble conditions in the system.

When it lights

The

SYSTEM TROUBLE

yellow LED flashes when one or more troubles occur and goes steady when you press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key. This LED also lights (flash or steady) if the microprocessor watchdog timer fails (CPU FAIL).

To turn off

Clear all trouble conditions.

4.3 How to Operate the Control Panel

This section contains instructions for operating the control panel under the following operating conditions:

• Normal Operation

• Fire Alarm Operation

• Trouble Operation

• Supervisory Operation

106


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Operation

4.3.1 How to Operate the Panel in Normal Operation

“Normal operation” refers to a control panel that is operating normally—no alarms or troubles in the system and the “All Systems Normal” message appears in the LCD display. Figure 100 shows a typical screen that appears with the control panel in normal operation:

Custom message area

YOUR@CUSTOM@MESSAGE

HERE@(40@CHARACTERS)

ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL

11:13A@@SUN@12/25/97

“All Systems Normal” message

Figure 100 Typical Display Message During Normal Operation

The control panel does the following functions at regular intervals when in normal operation:

• Polls all devices connected to the SLC and the four NAC/Panel Circuits for valid replies, alarms, supervisory, and trouble signals

• Checks for power supply troubles and batteries every 10 seconds

• Sends a supervisory query on the LCD-80 interface and verifies proper response

• Refreshes the LCD display and Terminal Mode LCD-80 display and updates time

• Scans the programming keypad for System Reset or Enter

• Auto tests detectors

• Tests system memory

Programming

Keypad

Enter and Cursor keys

1

J K L

5

M N O

6

P R S

7

Q

Z

T U V

8

DET

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM

RESET

System Status

LED Indicators (6)

Membrne

Operator Keys (4)

4.3.2 How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Condition

What is a Trouble Condition?

A control panel indicates a trouble condition when a trouble—for example, a short circuit or ground fault—exists in the fire alarm system. If all troubles clear and no supervisory or fire alarms exist in the system, the control panel returns to a normal operation, and sends an “All Systems Normal” message to the LCD display, LCD-80,

History buffer, and printer. This trouble restore occurs even if the troubles were never acknowledged (auto restore).

During a Trouble operation the control panel does the following:

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


107

Operation


• Sounds a pulsed tone.

• Flashes the

SYSTEM TROUBLE

LED.

• Activates the trouble relay.

• Sends a trouble message (see Figure 101 for a sample message) to the History buffer, to installed Terminal Mode LCD-80s, and to installed printers.

How the Panel Displays a Trouble

Figure 101 shows a sample trouble message for a module in trouble that appears on

LCD display during trouble operation.

Type Code of device in trouble. For details on

Type Codes, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

Type of event (trouble) and the type of device (pull station)

Software zone to which it is assigned

(zone 5), and the type of trouble that exists (open circuit)

Control modules report both open and short circuit messages for their NAC.

19-character custom descriptor for this device location

TROUBL@PULL@STATION

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

Z05@OPEN@CIRCUIT

11:13A@12/25/97@M37

Device address

Time and date of the activation

Figure 101 Sample Display of a Trouble Message

For example, in Figure 101, the M37 address represents module number 37. If the device in trouble was a detector, the “M” of address M37 is replaced with a “D”.

To Respond to a Trouble

If a trouble occurs, press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key to silence the panel sounder and change the System Trouble LED from flashing to steady. If multiple troubles exist, pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key silences all signals (block acknowledge). When pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key and at least one new alarm or trouble exists in the system, an Acknowledge message is sent to the History buffer, installed printers, and installed Terminal Mode LCD-80s.

If the trouble clears before or after an acknowledge, the clear trouble message is sent to the printer. Figure 102 shows an example of a clear trouble message sent to the printer:

CLR@TB@PULL@STATION@WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5@Z05@OPEN@CIRCUIT@11:13A@12/25/97@M37

Figure 102 Sample Clear Trouble Message

If all troubles clear and no supervisory or fire conditions exist in the system, the control panel returns to a normal operation, and sends an “All Systems Normal” message to the

LCD display, LCD-80, History buffer, and printer. This trouble restore occurs even if the troubles were never acknowledged (auto restore).

Pressing the

ALARM SILENCE

key when only troubles exist, produces the same effect as pressing the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key. The

ALARM SILENCE

LED does not light unless an alarm also exists in the system. For details on Alarm Silence, refer to “Alarm

Silence” on page 106.

If multiple trouble conditions exist in the system, the LCD display and installed

Terminal Mode LCD-80 display steps through each trouble automatically at a two-second rate. If you press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key, the LCD display stops on the current trouble for 1 minute, then begins to automatically step through events in the following order:

1. Alarms, in order of address.

2. Supervisory, in order of address, or security alarms.

108


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Operation

3. Troubles, in order of address.

To manually step through events, press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key.

4.3.3 How to Operate a Panel with a Trouble Monitor Point

Trouble Monitor points are monitor modules that monitor remote power supplies or other external equipment for short circuits. These types of monitor modules operate like monitored system functions that can produce troubles, but with the following differences:

• The display status banner is

ACTIVE

.

• The type code is

TROUBLE MON

. For more information on monitor module Type

Codes, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

• The monitor modules latch until the trouble condition(s) is cleared to normal operation and the system is reset.

• The monitor modules can have Control-by-Event (CBE).

Figure 103 shows a sample message for a monitor module with a Trouble Monitor

Point Type Code that appears on LCD display during trouble operation.

Type Code –

TROUBLE MON

. For details on

Type Codes, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

Status banner (

ACTIVE

)

Software zone to which it is assigned

(zone 5), and the type of trouble that exists (open circuit)

G H I

4

P R S

7

Q

Z

1

DET

D E F

3

J K L

5

M N O

6

T U V

8

W X Y

9

- / .

#

MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

Membrne

19-character custom descriptor for this device location

ACTIVE@TROUBLE MON

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

Z05@OPEN@CIRCUIT

11:13A@12/25/97@M37

Device activated

Time and date of the activation

Figure 103 Sample Display of a Message for a Trouble Monitor Point

4.3.4 How to Operate a Panel with a Fire Alarm

What is a Fire Alarm?

A fire alarm is a signal indicating an emergency condition that requires immediate attention. Fire alarms result from sources such as a manual pull stations and smoke detectors.

How the Panel indicates a Fire Alarm

When a fire alarm occurs, the control panel goes into a fire alarm condition. Figure 104 shows a sample LCD display for a control panel when a detector goes into alarm:

Type Code of device sending the Fire

Alarm signal. For details on Type Codes, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

Status banner

ALARM

:

Label of the first zone

ALARM:@PULL@STATION

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

FLR 05 MAIN BUILDING

11:13A 12/15/97 D37

Time and date the device activated

Device activated

Figure 104 Sample Display for an Fire Alarm

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


109

Operation


A control panel in Fire Alarm operation does the following:

• Activates the panel sounder with a steady sound.

• Flashes the

F

IRE

A

LARM

LED.

• Displays a status banner of

ALARM

along with specific information about the activated device as shown in Figure 104.

• Latches the device in alarm until the alarm condition is cleared and the system is reset. Refer to “System Reset” on page 105.

• Recalculates all Control-by-Event.

• Starts all timers, such as Silence Inhibit and Auto Silence.

• Activates the general alarm relay and general alarm zone Z00.

4.3.5 How to Operate a Panel with a Supervisory Condition

What is a Supervisory Condition?

A

Supervisory

is a signal indicating a need to respond to events such as supervision of a guard tour, a sprinkler, and so on.

How the Panel Indicates a Supervisory

When a supervisory signal occurs, the control panel indicates a supervisory condition.

Figure 104 shows a sample LCD display for a control panel with a supervisory signal.

1

G H I

4

Q Z

A B C

2

J K L

5

P R S

7

T U V

8

D E F

3

M N O

6

DET MOD

ENTER

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

09:45A THU 06/18/97

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

ALARM

SILENCE

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

DRILL

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM

RESET

Membrne

Status banner

ACTIVE

:

Type Code of device sending the

Supervisory signal. For details on Type

Codes, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.


ACTIVE@TAMPER

SPRINKLER@VALVE@105

FLR@5@MAIN@BUILDING

11:13A@12/25/97@ M37

SUPERVISORY

/

SECURITY

LED flashes


Device activated

Figure 105 Sample Display for a Supervisory Signal

A control panel in Supervisory operation does the following:

• Activates the panel sounder with a warbling tone.

• Flashes the

SUPERVISORY

LED.

• Displays a status banner of

ACTIVE

along with specific information about the activated device as shown in Figure 106.

• Activates the Supervisory relay.

• Latches the device until the Supervisory signal is cleared and the system is reset.

Note: In Supervisory operation, the Alarm relay does not activate, silenced alarms do not resound nor do they reactivate silenced alarm CBE, and timers do not start.

Supervisory signals track and may have their own Control-by-Event. They do not cause resound of alarms or reactivation of silenced alarm CBE. Supervisory circuits may also report open circuit troubles, which operate like any other trouble. If the event is a security point activation, this LED will operate the same as a supervisory, but the LCD display will show the security type code. Refer to Appendix E for further information on security alarms.

110


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Operation

4.3.6 How to Operate a Panel with a Non-Alarm Condition

What is a Non-Alarm Condition?

A

Non-Alarm

condition results when a monitor module programmed with one of the three Non-Alarm type codes (see Table 34) activates. Non-Alarm points activate their programmed CBE—but do not activate the

SYSTEM ALARM

LED or the panel sounder.

How the Panel indicates a Non-Alarm Condition

When a Non-Alarm signal occurs, the control panel changes the status banner to

ACTIVE

. Figure 106 shows a sample LCD display for a control panel with a Non-Alarm condition.

Status banner

ACTIVE

:

Type Code of the device sending the

Non-Alarm signal. For details on refer to Table 34.


ACTIVE HAZARD ALERT

MODULE ADDRESS 105

FLR@5@MAIN@BUILDING

11:13A@12/25/97@ M37


Device activated

Figure 106 Sample Display for an Non-Alarm Condition

Table 34 contains descriptions of Non-Alarm Type Codes:

If the LCD Display shows this Type Code

NON FIRE

HAZARD ALERT

FIRE CONTROL

The control panel does the following

Does not send a message to the LCD display, the History buffer, installed printer, or installed Terminal Mode LCD-80.

• Sends a message to the LCD display, History buffer, installed printer, and LCD-80 (status is

ACTIVE

) and

• Activates the four NACs steadily—regardless of the coding selection in Zone 98. For more information on coding, refer to

“Coding Operation (NAC only)” on page 117.

• Sounds the local piezo and lights the supervisory LED.

Send messages to the LCD display, History buffer, installed printers and installed Terminal Mode LCD 80s—regardless of the state of the control panel.

Table 34 Non-Alarm Point Type Codes

4.3.7 How to Operate the Panel with an Output Circuit

Trouble

Output circuits include the four Panel Circuits connected through TB2 and control or relay modules connected through the SLC via TB6. Output circuits have

Control-by-Event and trouble functions. Panel Circuits differ from control or relay modules in the following ways:

• Addresses (last three digits in LCD field) are B01, B02, B03 or B04.

• The default Type Code field is

BELL CIRCUIT

.

• They may be used for March Time, California Code, Temporal, and Two Stage coded functions.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


111

Operation

Control-By-Event Operation

4.3.8 How the Control Panel Indicates a Panel Circuit Trouble

• The

SYSTEM TROUBLE

LED flashes

• Trouble relay turns on

• A message is sent to the LCD display, History buffer, and installed printers, terminal mode LCD-80s, and CRT-2s

• A

TROUBL

status banner and a

B

ELL

C

IRCUIT

Type Code is displayed on the LCD display, along with information specific to the device, as shown in Figure 107.

Status banner TROUBL

Type Code

BELL CIRCUIT

TROUBL BELL CIRCUIT

PANEL CIRCUIT NO. 1

Z00 SHORT CIRCUIT

10:21A 07/24/98@ B01

Type of trouble (short circuit shown)

Address of the NAC

(B01-B04)

Figure 107 Sample Display of a Panel Circuit in Trouble

4.4 Control-By-Event Operation

Control-by-event (CBE) is done through 99 software zones. Each system point

(detector, control module, monitor module, relay module, or NAC) may list up to five zones in its program information. A general alarm zone (Z00) may be listed for output

(control) points, but is not necessary to list for input points. Z00 is not activated by non-alarm or supervisory points.

If any input device (detector or monitor module) becomes active and it is not disabled, it activates all software zones in its list. An output device (control or relay module, or

NAC) that is not disabled is turned on if any of the software zones in its list are active.

This is basically an “or” functionality. Zones 90 through 99 are reserved for special functions such as releasing (Refer to Section 3 “Programming”).

Control-by-event (CBE) control is done through 99 software zones. Each input point

(detector, monitor module) and output point (control or relay module, NAC/Panel

Circuit) can be programmed to list up to five software zones. Non-Alarm or

Supervisory points do not activate software zone Z00 (general alarm).

Zones 90-99 are reserved for special functions such as releasing (refer to Section 3

“Programming”).

Input and output devices with listed software zones work as follows:

• Inputs – When an input device (detector or monitor module) activates, so do all software zones listed to the input device.

• Outputs – When a software zone activates, the output device ( control or relay module

, NAC/Panel Circuit) turns on.

Figure 108 shows an illustration of simple CBE for Zone 04.

Input

– Detector at

SLC address 12 listing Z04 in its

CBE.

D12

Z04

Z04

B04

Z04

Output

–

NAC/Panel Circuit

B04 listing software zone Z04 in its CBE.

Software Zone

– Zone 04

Figure 108 CBE Example

112


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Releasing Functions

Operation

In Figure 108, the input device (detector D12) lists zone Z04 and the output device

(B04) both lists zone Z04 in their CBE. If Detector D12 activates: Zone Z04 activates, which causes the device connected to B04 to activate.

4.5 Releasing Functions

4.5.1 Overview

Zones 91-94 are reserved for releasing zones—providing up to four independent releasing operations. Each releasing zone includes the following options:

Option

Cross-zoning

Delay Timer

Abort

Manual Release

Soak Timer

Description

Select one of three types of cross-zoning. Refer to Table 36.

Select a 0–60 second delay before activating a zone.

An abort switch-type code used to abort activation of a zone.

Allows immediate zone activation by overriding the abort function, cross-zone function, and delay timer.

Automatically shuts off the releasing device. Select 10-15 minutes for a

Soak Timer or zero for no Soak Timer.

Table 35 Cross Zoning Options

!

WARNING: When used for CO

2

releasing applications, observe proper precautions as stated in NFPA 12. Do not enter the protected space unless physical lockout and other safety procedures are fully completed. Do not use software disable functions in the panel as lockout.

!

WARNING: Use only SLC control module outputs for agent releasing applications.

4.5.2 How to Select Cross Zone Options

The Cross Zone options lets you program the control panel to activate a releasing zone after two initiating devices activate. (If not using Cross Zoning, set CROSS= to N as shown in Figure 141 on page 148.) Table 36 contains a summary of the types of cross zoning and the conditions for activating a releasing zone.

Type

N

Y

Z

H

Activates when

Cross zoning not selected.

Two or more detectors, all mapped to one of the four releasing zones (91-94) activate.

Two or more detectors, mapped to two different software zones and one of the four releasing zones (91-94) activate.

At least one smoke detector and at least one heat detector, all mapped to one of the four releasing zones (91-94) activate.

Table 36 Cross Zoning Types

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


113

Operation

Releasing Functions

Figure 109 shows an example of one heat detector, three smoke detectors, and an SLC control module connected to a releasing circuit mapped as a releasing zone, using cross zoning:

Smoke

D02

Z01, Z91

SLC module

M01

Z91

Smoke

D03

Z02, Z91

Z01 Z91 Z02

Smoke

D01

Z01, Z91

Heat

D04

Z02, Z91

Only the first non-special zone listed in the zone map is used to determine Cross=Z.

Figure 109 Cross Zoning Example

Cross Zoning Example

Table 36 lists examples of devices mapped to releasing zones.

The following explanations apply to the examples shown in Figure 109:

•

Cross=N

An alarm from any detector activates the releasing module circuit.

•

Cross=Y

An alarm from any two detectors activates the releasing module circuit.

•

Cross=Z

Release requires the activation of two detectors mapped to different zones: D01 and D02 cannot activate the releasing module circuit because both detectors are mapped to Z01; D01 and D03 can activate the releasing module circuit because they are mapped to different zones.

•

Cross=H

Release requires activation of heat detector D04 and one smoke detector (D01, D02, or D03).

4.6 Releasing Functions

Zones 91, 92, 93, and 94 are reserved for special releasing functions. This allows for up to four simultaneous release operations (quad hazard). Each zone includes the following:

•

Cross Zone

will activate only if two or more fire type input points are activated that list this zone. In addition, there are two other types of cross-zones: one cross zone requires that the two devices reside in different zones; and the other requires that the two devices are a smoke detector plus a heat detector.

•

Delay timer

– A timer that allows the selection of a 0 to 60 second delay before the zone can activate.

•

Abort switch

– type code in a given zone is used to abort activation of the zone.

•

Manual Release

– overrides the abort function, cross-zone function, and delay timer, and activates the zone immediately.

•

Soak

– a Soak timer automatically shuts off the releasing device. Select 10 through

15 minutes (or zero for no timer).

A hazard is protected by assigning one of the four zones to each initiating device, abort switch, manual release switch, and release solenoid. Refer to Appendix D for detailed information about releasing applications.

114


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Intelligent Detector Functions

Operation

4.7 Intelligent Detector Functions

4.7.1 Summary of Detector Functions

Table 37 contains a summary of functions for intelligent detectors used with the control panel.

Function

Analog Display

Day/Night Sensitivity

Operation

Maintenance Alert

Automatic Test

Operation

Type Code

Supervision

LED Control

Operation

Alarm Verification and

Counter Operation

Description

The control panel reads and displays analog information from the 99 analog detectors. The display shows the percent of the alarm threshold for each detector.

You can program the system to automatically force smoke detectors to minimum sensitivity during the day. For more information, refer to

“Time Functions” on page 116.

When compensation reaches the limit of the amount of drift compensation that can be safely applied, the control panel reports a special trouble condition, per national fire code standards. This condition also activates if the detector remains at very high or very low levels for an extended time.

The control panel performs an automatic test of each detector every

256 minutes. Failure to meet the test limits causes an “Detector Test

Fail” trouble.

The control panel monitors hardware device type codes (FSI, FSP,

FST, monitor module, control module, and relay module) for each installed device at regular intervals (an interval can take up to 30 minutes for full capacity system). If a mismatch of type compared to the program occurs, the control panel generates a point trouble labelled

I

NVALID

T

YPE

.

A global program selection to prevent detector LEDs from blinking during normal operation. A typical application is in a sleeping area where a blinking light can distract people. As a standard function, the control panel allows all LEDs to turn on in alarm.

The control panel performs alarm verification on programmed FSI and

FSP intelligent smoke detectors. The verification time is a global program selection of 0–30 seconds. Each detector includes a verification counter, which displays the number of times that a detector entered verification but did not time-out to alarm. The counter increments to 99 and holds.

Table 37 Intelligent Detector Functions

4.7.2 Pre-Alarm Operation/Advanced Warning Addressable

Combustion Sensing (AWACS™)

If a photo or ionization detector exceeds the programmed Pre-Alarm level, a Pre-Alarm condition occurs: the panel sounder and zone 99 activate; and the

PRE

-

ALARM WARNING

LED lights. Figure 110 shows a typical message that is sent to the control panel LCD,

LCD-80, printer and History buffer.

PREALM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

ROOM@5024

ALERT: 0.50/1.00%

11:13A@12/25/97@D66

This example shows a detector programmed for alarm at 1.00% per foot

(30.48 cm) of obscuration (High level). The 50% indicates that the detector is at the Alert level programmed for 50% of that, or 0.50% per foot (30.48 cm) . The 50% is a real-time display and may change. Alert Pre-Alarms automatically restore.

Figure 110 Typical Display for a Pre-Alarm Alert Event

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


115

Operation

Time Functions

An Action Pre-Alarm is indicated if a detector exceeds the Action level threshold.

When this occurs, all functions of the Alert level occur, plus a special Action software zone (5th zone) may be activated if programmed. Action Pre-Alarms latch until reset.

Figure 111 shows a typical Action Pre-Alarm display:

PREALM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

ROOM@5024

ACTION: 0.72/1.00%

11:25A@12/25/97@D66

Figure 111 Typical Display for a Pre-Alarm Action Event

4.8 Time Functions

4.8.1 Overview

The control panel includes a real-time clock that provides time-of-day, date, and day-of-week. The clock includes a lithium battery backup. Time normally displays in a

12-hour time format with month/day/year. Table 38 contains descriptions and typical uses for time functions.

Time

Function

Time Control

Command

Day/Night

Sensitivity

Adjust

Holiday

Description

ZONES 95 and 96 are reserved for control-by-time special functions, intended for ancillary (non-fire) applications (such as lighting control, setting a thermostat, and so forth).

Typical Uses

For example, program ZONES 95 and 96 to activate at one time of day and deactivate at another time, on certain days of the week. You can turn a

non-fire

control point on and off, by using ZONE 95 or 96.

For day/night sensitivity use, consider ZONES 95 and 96 as Day

ZONES.

If an FSI or FSP detector CBE lists

ZONE 95 or 96, the control panel sets the detector sensitivity to the minimum

(low) setting when ZONE 95 or 96 is activated by the programmed date/time in its CBE. When ZONE 95 or 96 deactivates, the detector sensitivity returns to the programmed setting.

The control panel reserves ZONE 97 for setting holiday dates (up to 9 days).

When the current date matches any of the nine holiday dates, the control panel activates ZONE 97.

Other uses for zone 97 include: a special day-of-year control; or an

8th day in programming ZONES 95 and 96.

Table 38 Control Time Functions

116


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Time Functions

Operation

4.8.2 Coding Operation (NAC only)

Zone 98—reserved for NAC coding functions—is only used by NACs listing zone 98.

You can select one of the four code types listed in Table 39:

Code

March Time (default)

Two-Stage

Two-Stage Canada 3

Two-Stage Canada 5

California

Temporal

Signal

120 PPM (Pulses Per Minute)

Alert signal – 20 PPM; General alarm signal: Temporal

Alert signal – 20 PPM; Drill Switch: Temporal

Timer: 3 minutes


Timer: 5 minutes

10 sec. on, 5 sec. off, repeats

0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 1.5 off, repeats

Table 39 Zone 8 Type Codes

Notes on using coding functions:

•

Control Modules.

Zone 98 does not work if listed in the CBE of control modules.

•

Two-Stage.

When an alarm occurs, an NAC programmed for two-stage, and not activated by another zone, pulses at 20 PPM. After 5 minutes, the NAC changes to

Temporal unless you press the

ACKNOWLEDGE

/

STEP

key. Pressing the

D

RILL

key on the control panel changes the NAC pulse to Temporal pattern.

•

Two-Stage Canada.

Functions like standard Two-Stage except only the Manual

Evacuate will cause NAC to go to second stage. If acknowledge is pressed on first stage, timer will not time out. Subsequent alarm will restart timer.

4.8.3 Presignal/PAS Operation

Zone 90 is reserved for pre-signal functions and is used to delay control points for human verification. If zone 90 is included in a control or relay module or Notification

Appliance Circuit’s CBE list, it inhibits all other CBE. Detectors and Monitor Modules must call out Zone 90 in their program to be included in the pre-signal/PAS operation.

When any alarm occurs and no PAS inhibit type monitor module is activated, Zone 90 activates. If a second alarm activates, or the

DRILL

key is pressed, Zone 90 goes false. If

PAS is selected, and the Acknowledge key is not pressed within 15 seconds, Zone 90 goes false. At the first alarm, a programmable 0–180 second timer starts. If an Alarm

Silence occurs, the timer stops. If the delay timer expires, manual activation will activate outputs mapped to Zone 90. The System Alarm relay, the 4XTM Polarity

Reversal Alarm Output, and the 4XTM Municipal Box Output delay if PAS is selected, but do not delay for Presignal operations.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


117

Operation

Read Status

4.8.4 Special System Timers

The control panel can operate with special system timers: Silence Inhibit, Auto Silence, and Alarm Verification. Table 40 contains descriptions of how each timer works.

Timer

Silence Inhibit

Auto Silence

Alarm

Verification

Duration

0-300 seconds

600-900 seconds(0=no timer selected)

0-30 seconds

If selected

Starts at first alarm and restarts with each new alarm. Disables the

ALARM SILENCE

key.

Automatically shuts off outputs selected as silenceable after the programmed time elapses.

To restart the timer, press the

DRILL

key.

The control panel ignores an FSI or FSP smoke detector for the Alarm Verification time. If another point alarm occurs during the Alarm Verification time, the control panel dumps the timer and activates the alarm. If a time-out and an alarm exist, the initiating device CBE executes all standard functions. If at time-out an alarm no longer exists in the alarm initiating device, the control panel increments a verification counter

(1-99) for the device and returns to normal operation.

Table 40 Special System Timers

4.8.5 Waterflow Circuits Operation

If an alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a Waterflow type code, the

ALARM SILENCE

key will not function.

4.8.6 Disable/Enable Operation

Disabled input points do not cause an alarm or any Control-by-Event activity. The control panel does the following:

• Holds all disabled output points in the off-state

• Handles all disabled points as troubles, but displays DISABL in the status banner.

4.8.7 Style 6 Operation

The control panel will detect a trouble in an SLC wired and programmed for Style 6 or

Style 7 and drive both ends of the line to maintain communication over the SLC. The trouble latches and displays on the control panel as a Style 6 trouble type until you press the

SYSTEM RESET

key on the control panel. Style 7 requires use of ISO-X modules.

4.9 Read Status

4.9.1 Overview

Read Status functions do not require a password. The control panel continues to provide fire protection while in Read Status. You can enter Read Status while in Fire Alarm or

Trouble mode. If a new alarm or trouble occurs during Read Status functions, the control panel automatically exits Read Status.

118


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Read Status

Operation

4.9.2 How to Enter Read Status

Press the

ENTER key. The control panel displays the Program Entry screen as shown in

Figure 112:

1=PROGRAM

2=READ@STATUS


Figure 112 Program Entry Screen

From the Program Entry Screen, press the

2

key. The control panel displays the Read

Status screen as shown in Figure 113:

READ@POINT=*/#,AA,E

PRINT@POINTS=1,E

READ@HISTORY=2,E

PRINT@HISTORY=3,E

Figure 113 Read Status Screen

If attempting to read a point that is not installed, the control panel displays NOT

INSTALLED.

4.9.3 Read Status Options

To do a Read Status, follow the instructions in Table 41. For explanation of history operation, refer to “Using the History Buffer” on page 124.

To Do this

Read Point

Print Points

Read History

Print History

• Select the type of point to read: * for a detector, # for a module, or *# for a bell circuit.

• Enter the two-digit address of the point; then press the

ENTER

key.

Press the

1

key; then press the

ENTER

key.

Press the

2

key; then press the

ENTER

key.

Press the

3

key; then press the

ENTER

key.

Table 41 Read Status Options

During all Read Status operations (except print operations) the control panel starts a two-minute timer each time you press a key. If the control panel does not detect a key press for two minutes, the control panel leaves the current operation and returns to the previous display.

• Press the Left cursor (Backspace) key to delete the previous entry.

• Press the left cursor (backspace) again to exit Read Status.

4.9.4 Read Point

Read Point operations display point status on the LCD display and on the terminal mode LCD-80s, but the status is not sent to the serial ports or the History buffer. After a point read, you can press the

down

key to read the next point in sequence, or press the

up

key read the previous point in sequence. The sequence of points is:

• Detector points 01-99

• Module points 01-99

• Panel Circuits 01-04

• System parameters

• Software Zones 01-89

• Special Zones 90-99

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


119

Operation

Read Status

Read Point Status

Figure 114 shows an example of read point for a detector and Figure 115 shows an example of read point for a module.

Detector Example

For example, to read the status of a photoelectric detector at address 13: press *, enter the address (13), then press the

ENTER key. The control panel displays information about the detector as shown in Figure 114:

Current status of the detector (

NORMAL

,

ALARM

,

TROUBL

, or

DISABL

)

Custom Label for the detector

Type Code

CBE selections for the detector

NORMAL@SMOKE(PHOTO)

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

Z05@ZO1@Z15@Z87@Z90

0.15/1.00%@DPV08@D13

Current detector reading of percent of alarm (15% of 1.0

equals 0.15% per foot (30.48

cm) obscuration).

Detector sensitivity selection (See

Appendix G “Pre-Alarm

(AWACS™) Applications”.)

Drift compensation enabled; if not enabled (*).

Address (01-99)

D (detector); if not a detector: M

(module), Z (zone), or B (panel circuit)

Alarm Verification count showing the detector entered the verification cycle eight times since the counter was last cleared.

Alarm Verification selection enabled; if not enabled (*).

Pre-Alarm enabled (if not enabled (*).

Figure 114 Detector Read Status Sample Screen

Module Example

For example, to read the status of a monitor module at address

08: press #, enter the address (08), then press the

ENTER

key. The control panel displays information about the module as shown in Figure 115:

Custom label for this device

Type Code (For explanations, refer to

Table 23 on page 82)

PROGRM@CONTROL

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z00@Z@@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@S*M08

Default zone selection is

Z00 (general alarm)

CBE selections

Silenceable (S) selected by default.

(* = not selected).

Required selection


“M” (Module) identifies the type of device

Walk Test (*) is not selected by default. (To select, change to “W”)

Figure 115 Module Read Status Sample Screen

120


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Read Status

Zone Number

Zone Number

Operation

Software Zones 01-89

To read the status of a zone directly, press *, press * again, then enter the two-digit zone number and press the

ENTER

key. Figure 116 contains a typical display that shows the status of zone 20:

OFF is the zone status (status can be ON or OFF).

OFF@SOFTWARE@ZONE

FLR@5@MAIN@BUILDING

Z20

FLR 5 MAIN BUILDING is the custom label programmed for this zone.

Z20 is the zone number.

Figure 116 Typical Zone Read Status Screen

Software Zone 90

Figure 117 contains a typical display that shows the status of software zone 90

(Presignal delay control).


DELAY=180 indicates the programmed Presignal delay in seconds.

OFF@SOFTWARE@ZONE

PRESIGNAL@DELAY

DELAY=180

PAS=YES @@@@@@@Z90


PAS=YES (could be NO) indicates that Positive Alarm

Sequence operation is selected in the program.

Figure 117 Typical Presignal Delay Screen

Software Zones 91, 92, 93, and 94

Figure 118 shows a typical display for the status of a releasing control zone (software zones 91, 92, 93, or 94):

DELAY=30 indicates programmed delay time in seconds.

OFF is the zone status

(status can be ON or OFF).

OFF@SOFTWARE@ZONE

RELEASE@CONTROL

DELAY=30@ABORT=ULI

CROSS=Y@SOAK=10@Z91

ABORT=ULI indicates the abort function, if an abort switch is mapped to this zone (ULI, IRI, NYC, or

AHJ).

CROSS=Y indicates that cross zoning is used (must have two or more detectors programmed to this zone in alarm to activate the zone).


SOAK indicates the soak timer (automatic shut off) value in minutes (00 = no soak timer).

Figure 118 Typical Display for a Releasing Control Zone

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


121

Operation

Zone Number

Read Status

Time Control – Software Zones 95 or 96

Figure 119 shows a typical display for the status of time control zone 95. In addition to automatic activation of non fire control points, this zone may be used for detector day/night sensitivity select. If day/night sensitivity is desired for a smoke detector, it must call out Zone 95 or 96 in its program. When the fire control is active, it forces the detector sensitivity to the low setting (2.0% per foot (30.48 cm) obscuration for photoelectric detector).




OFF@SOFTWARE@ZONE

TIME@CONTROL

ON=7:00@OFF=18:00

DAYS=@MTWTF@H@@@@Z95

DAYS= MTWTF H indicates the programmed days of week that the on/off times are effective.

H is a holiday, which is defined by ZONE 97.

ON=7:00 OFF=18:00 indicates the programmed times that this zone will automatically turn on and off each day. The times are in 24-hour (military) format.

Figure 119 Typical Display for a Time Control Zone

Holiday – Software Zone 97

Figure 120 contains a typical display that shows the status of software zone 97 (Holiday zone). The day/month numbers are user-programmed holidays of the year.

OFF@HOLIDAY@ZONE@97

01/01@04/10@05/26

07/04@09/07@11/26

11/27@12/24@12/25

Figure 120 Typical Display for a Holiday Zone

NAC Coding – Software Zone 98

Figure 121 contains a typical display that shows the status of software zone 98 (NAC coding):



OFF@SOFTWARE@ZONE

CODE@TYPE:

MARCH@TIME @@@

Z98

MARCH TIME indicates the type of coding that will be applied to each of the four panel NACs if mapped to ZONE 98.


Figure 121 Typical Display for a NAC Coding Zone

Figure 121 shows NAC coding of March Time. Other possible program selections are

Temporal, California, and Two-stage. For more information on coding, refer to “Coding

Operation (NAC only)” on page 117.

122


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Read Status

Operation

Software Zone 99 (Pre-Alarm)

Figure 122 contains a typical display that shows the status of software zone 99

(Pre-Alarm). Zone 99 turns on if any detector reaches it's Pre-Alarm threshold to indicate an incipient alarm, or the need for detector maintenance. Zone 99 can be mapped to any control point.


OFF@PRE-ALARM@ZONE

ALERT=50%@OF@ALARM

ACTION = 00% OF ALARM

ALERT=50%

indicates that the detector is at the Alert level programmed for

50%. For more information on setting Pre-Alarm, refer to “Pre-Alarm

Operation/Advanced Warning Addressable Combustion Sensing (AWACS™)” on page 115.

Figure 122 Typical Display of a Pre-Alarm

System Parameters

Figure 123 contains a typical display that shows System Parameters. To read the

System Parameters directly, press the * key two times, then press the

ENTER

key.


VERIFY=30@USA@TIME

ANNUN=ACS(1+2)@LocT

BLINK=Y@ST=4@AVPS=N

For LocT, the terminal must be in the same room as the control panel.

Figure 123 Typical Display of the System Parameters Screen

The following describes the items in Figure 123. For explanations of system parameters, refer to “How to Edit System Functions (7=sys)” on page 89.

•

SIL INH=060

is the Silence Inhibit time in seconds, required in Canada and some areas of the United‘ States (SIL INH=000 indicates the timer is not selected).

•

AUTO=600

is the automatic silence timer in seconds (000=not selected).

•

VERIFY

=30 is the Alarm Verification timer in seconds (00=not selected).

•

USA TIME

may be EUR TIME if European time/date display format is selected.

•

ANNUN=ACS(1+2)

indicates that the EIA-485 port (TB5) is programmed to use point annunciation (ACS family) and that both Addresses 1 and 2 are used. Other selections include ANNUN=ACS(ADDR 1), ANNUN=LCD80 (T),

ANNUN=NON SUPV and ANNUN=UDACT. NON SUPV is terminal mode and is selected if no ACS annunciation is needed.

•

LocT

indicates that a local terminal (CRT-2) is connected and can be used for

Acknowledge, Signal Silence, Drill, and Reset functions.

•

BLINK=Y

refers to the LEDs on intelligent devices. The blink may be suppressed for certain applications.

•

ST=4

refers to the NFPA wiring style desired for the communications loop. It can be set to Style 4 or Style 6. The ST=6 setting is used for both Style 6 and Style 7 operation.

•

AVPS=N

indicates that there is no AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R expansion power supply installed (refer to Appendix J).

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


123

Operation

Read Status

For instructions on how to clear the contents of the

History buffer, refer to “How to

Clear the History Buffer (4=clr hist)” on page 98.

4.9.5 Using the History Buffer

What is a History Buffer?

The History buffer is an electronic record of the last 650 events recorded by the control panel. For information on reading or printing the History buffer, refer to “Read Status

Options” on page 119. All events are time and date stamped. Events in the History buffer include the following:

• All alarms, troubles and operator actions, such as Acknowledge, System Reset,

Signal Silence, Manual Evacuate (Drill), and Walk Test.

• Each programming entry, which includes a number indicating the programming submenu (0-9).

Figure 124 shows the first display when you read history:

EVENT HISTORY START

(BACKSPACE TO ABORT)

EVENTS IN HISTORY : 067

***********************

Figure 124 Sample Display History Buffer

When you enter Read History, the most recent event appears in the LCD display. Figure

125 shows a sequence of the first three events that appear in the LCD display:

TROUBL IN SYSTEM

NO DEVICES INSTALLED

01:23P WED 05/22/98

The time that the event occurred

PROGRAM CHANGE

1=AUTO PROGRAM

01:25P WED 05/22/98

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

01:27P WED 05/22/98

Figure 125 Sample Read History Display

124


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Read Status

Operation

Table 42 contains instructions for moving around the History buffer.

To Press

Display earlier events

Display later events

Exit and return to the Read Status screen

or the

SYSTEM RESET

key

Table 42 Read History Navigation Keys

What is a Shadow History Buffer?

The control panel also has a non-erasable shadow History buffer that always contains the last 650 events in time. Table 43 contains instructions for reading and printing the shadow History buffer.

To Press

Read the shadow History buffer

Print the shadow History buffer

Table 43 How to Read and Print the Shadow History Buffer

During all Read Status operations—except print operations—a two-minute timer starts.

If no key is pressed during the two-minute timer, the LCD returns to the previous display. Each key press restarts the two-minute timer.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


125

Power Supply Calculations

Appendix A Power Supply Calculations

Overview

A.1 Overview

This appendix contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in alarm and standby conditions. This is a four-step process, consisting of the following:

1. Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the system.

2. Calculating the power supply load current for non-fire and fire alarm conditions and calculating the secondary (battery) load.

3. Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power loss occurs.

4. Selecting the proper batteries for your system.

A.2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit

The control panel requires connection to a separate, dedicated AC branch circuit

(120 VAC for AFP-200 and 220/240 VAC for AFP-200E), which must be labeled FIRE

ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm control panel. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes as well as local codes. Use 14 AWG wire with 600-volt insulation for this branch circuit.

Use Table 44 and Table 45 to determine the total amount of current, in AC amperes (A), that must be supplied to the system.

Device Type

(amps)

Number of

Devices Current Draw

Total

Current per Device

AFP-200

AVPS-24

1

[ ]

X

X

3.0

1.0

APS-6R [ ] X

Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required

2.5

=

=

=

=

3.0

Table 44 S120 VAC Branch Circuit Requirements

A

Device Type

(amps)

Number of

Devices Current Draw

Total

Current per Device

AFP-200E

AVPS-24E

1

[ ]

X

X

1.5

0.5

APS-6R [ ] X

Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required

1.2

=

=

=

=

1.5

Table 45 220/240 VAC Branch Circuit Requirements

A

126


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

The Main Power Supply


A.3 The Main Power Supply

The control panel's main power supply can supply a total of 5.0 A in alarm and 1.0 A in standby (Non-Alarm condition). The current available for powering external devices, however, is subject to lower limits as shown in Figure 126 and Figure 127.

A.3.1 Current Limitations in Standby

Current for operating an external device in standby (Non-Alarm) is subject to the following limitations:

1. Non-resettable power (TB1, terminals 3 and 4) and resettable power (TB1, terminals 5 and 6) are limited to a combined total of 0.5 A. Using Table 47,

Calculation Column 1, verify that the combined subtotal of rows 4 and 5 is less than 0.5 A.

2. The total power supply load is limited to 1.0 A. Using Table 47, verify that the total of Calculation Column 1 is less than 1.0 A.

1.0 A Total System

0.5 A combined

1

2 3 4 5 6

TB1

Figure 126 TB1 Standby Current Limitations

A.3.2 Current Limitations in Alarm – System Operation on

Primary Power

Current for operating external devices in alarm is subject to the following limitations:

1. High ripple power (TB1, terminals 1 and 2) is limited to 1.5 A. Using Table 47

Calculation Column 2, verify that the subtotal of row 4 is less than 1.5 A.

2. Non-resettable power (TB1, terminals 3 and 4) and resettable power (TB1, terminals 5 and 6) are limited to a combined total of 0.5 A. Using Table 47

Calculation Column 2, verify that the subtotal of rows 5 and 6 combined is less than 0.5 A.

3. The maximum load on NAC 1 (TB1, terminals 1 and 2) cannot exceed 2.5 A.

Using Table 47 Calculation Column 2, verify that the subtotal of row 7 is less than

2.5 A.

4. The maximum combined load on NAC 2, NAC 3, and NAC 4 (TB2, terminals 3-8) cannot exceed 2.5 A. Using Table 47 Calculation Column 2, verify that the subtotal of row 8, 9, and 10 is less than 2.5 A.

5. The total power supply load is limited to 5.0 A. Using Table 47, verify that the subtotal for Calculation Column 2 is less than 5.0 A.

5.0 A Total System

2.5 A combined

0.5 A combined

1.5 A

2.5 A

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TB1

TB2

Figure 127 TB1 and TB2 Alarm Current Limitations

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


127


Calculating the System Current Draw

A.4 Calculating the System Current Draw

A.4.1 Overview

The control panel must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously during the non-fire alarm condition. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on the system power supply when primary power is applied, use Calculation Column 1 in Table 47.

The control panel must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition. To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply, use Calculation Column 2 in Table

47. The secondary power source (batteries) must be able to power the system during a primary power loss. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on the secondary power source, use Calculation Column 3 in Table 47.

When calculating current draw and the battery size, note the following:

• “Primary” refers to the main power source for the control panel.

• “Secondary” refers to the control panel's backup batteries.

• All currents are given in amperes (A). Table 46 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes.

To convert....

Milliamperes (mA) to amperes (A)

Microamperes (µA) to amperes (A)

Multiply

mA x 0.001

µA x 0.000001

Example

3 mA x 0.001= 0.003 A

300 µA x 0.000001= 0.0003 A

Table 46 Converting to Full Amperes

A.4.2 How to Use Table 47 to Calculate System Current

Draws

Use Table 47 to calculate current draws as follows.

1. Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns.

2. Enter the current draw where required. Refer to the Notifier Device Compatibility

Document for compatible devices and their current draw.

3. Calculate the current draws for each in all columns.

4. Sum the total current for each column.

5. Copy the totals from column 2 and column 3 to Table 48 on page 131.

Figure 128 shows the types of current that you enter into Table 47:

Calculation Column 1

– The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a non-fire alarm condition, with AC power applied. This current draw cannot exceed 1.0 A.


– The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a fire alarm condition, with AC power applied. This current draw cannot exceed 5 A.


– the standby current drawn from the batteries in a non-fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power. R

1

2

3 w a t e

B

A a

V s

P c

S

N

N

N e o g

1 h o e h e a e g o

Q

2

S

4 y N

C y r a e c s c

1 a c a p m n o p

N

N m o o

X y s N m c m u c

A a

N u o r a y t

C

A N

, n d

N

N p a e p a a a v s o

A p p

N

N w

1 p e e a o

N e n X y

N A a a m n n m c o x x d n d v n p u n

A

C a s

N u o o a

F a c c a e

2 e v s

C c y t w

A1 v v u

S

Q e

N

N s e m e a

X n a a

X x x n c A c o e

C n a

1 o r a m a t u y x

A

A

N

N

C

C

0

0

=

=

M

M

0 u o

A

A

A N

N

N a

0

X

X w

1 1 0

0 a

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

1

1

N

T

A

L

R o

B

C

D

C

D e

F h

D

M

M

A

N s o o w

7 n

1

M e e u n

7 o o h

C

8

1 e

1 e n e

8 e

6 s

6

T

0 e

R c a w

7 m

A e

A

A

A o b c

1

1 c

C

L e m o

T

T

T

C x x x x e x x x e x e d x a a

A b

D

A

A

0 a m 0

E

C e

8

D

M

M

P s s

R m

0 o m o a w

0 o o

0

0

3

M

0 p o o

0 n 4

0

T

3 c

3 o

3

0 2 x n w e

5

0

0

2 x x

0 c

2 d a d o

A

A

=

1 e

=

=

A

0

0

0

0

0 c

N

0

5 v

4

S

S e

M a k

2 k b y e

M e

0 x e d x

X

= d

= d e e

0

2 e e e

S

0 e e

8

1

1 c e

5

1

1

8

6

0

5 e

5

0 s

0

6 e e e x

3 x s s

2 x x c c

2 c o o x s x

4

=

=

=

=

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5

4

2

N

T

C

M

S

M

N

R

D

1 O

R

2 S

S

A

B

B

R

R

A

A

N e o m

2 e

C o

2

C e

2 e

C o

C o e e e e

# e

# a

# e a

# e a a c s

1

2

3

4 c s m m n

L

B

D

D

M

M

M

F

C

6

X

X

H

O

D

X

X

X

X

1

X

C

7

5 e

1

2 o

5

5

0

5 m m

1

1

1 e u

R p v

T

X u e

M

T o n e

M n s a

8 a a a a p n n n

5

M s

P c

P

1 h r

N

N g

N

N m e

H x x

N m g o n g g n n x x x

. 0 c o o o o o o o o

N m

S a a o o n

S a

B o d

A e s o e e o e o e a

A s o

0

0 u

A s

A n

C

M e o

D u a

P n

X

S

X

H

0

0

D n s

D

X

0

0 o

0

0

1 c e s

A r

1 m

1 e

1 p

3 e

7 e y m p n u x

4 y

0

0

0 p

1 p

1

3

X

5 a

0

0

0 c n

0

0 e

P n

0

1

O

5 n s

N o r o n

1

1

5 x a o x x p x m d

0

0

0

. ) o n

2

A a a c

=

=

=

0

0

0

5 e p a o n p a n a p o o a n

5

0

1

5

6 x o

1

5

2

2

1

0

0 x x M b x x

0

4 n a d x x d n x x n x a d d d n a

B

9

0

5

5 n d n d n c

4

8 s

0

0

G

C

=

L

0

0

= e

=

=

X

=

= e

0

0

0

0

0 e c

3

3 c o e e e o

X 0 r o m

L y a o o

0

1

0

0

1

0

0 s

0

T p

0 7

0

0

1

0

6

2

0

0

3 u

=

=

B

=

= x x x x x

S

T a

S r a e m x a d

2 5

0

0 x x x

5

2

1

0

4 s

N c a n

2

0

3

0 1

9

L

0

0

0

5 a

0

0

0 =

0 e

=

= o r d e

=

0

0 d =

=

= n b e s

0

0

0

0 h d o

A y

0

0

0

0

0

0 m a a

Figure 128 Calculating the System Current Draws

128


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Calculating the System Current Draw


Table 47 contains three columns for calculating current draws. For each column, calculate the current and enter the total (in amps) in the bottom row. When finished, copy the totals from Calculation Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 48 on page 131.

Notes for Table 47:

1. Refer to the Notifier Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and their current draws.

2. For non-English language systems, the LCD-80TM (Terminal Mode) standby current is 0.100 A.

3. Do not enter current for NAC #3 and NAC #4 in Table 47 if powering these circuits from an AVPS-24 or APS-6R. For more information on the AVPS-24 and

APS-6R, refer to Appendix J.

4. The RTM-8 alarm current is based on all eight alarm relays being activated. The alarm current can be reduced by 0.019 A for each zone (between zone 1 and zone 8) that is not used by the system.

5. Enter in Column 2: “number of MMX-2 plus FZM-1” multipled by 0.090

Row Category

Qty

N/A


Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Current

(amps)

X [current draw]=

N/A total

N/A 1

2

3

4

5

6

Basic System

APS-6R

AVPS-24

High ripple power

TB1 terminals 1 and 2

Notification apps. via control module

Notification apps. via control module

Releasing devices via control module

Other compatible devices (Note 1)

Non-resettable power


AFM-16AT/AFM-32A Series

ACM-16AT/ACM-32A Series

AEM-16AT/AEM-32A Series

AFM-16A

LCD-80, LCD-80TM (Note 2)

ACM-8R (refer to Doc. 15342)

LDM (refer to Doc. 15885)

UDACT Communicator


Resettable Power

Four-wire smoke detector

Two-wire smoke detector connected to MMX-2/FZM-1 (Note 5)

A77-716B Relay


7

8

9

NAC #1 (Note 1)


Notification Appliance

Releasing Solenoid

NAC #2 (Note 1)



Releasing Solenoid

NAC #3 (Notes 1 and 3)



Releasing Solenoid

10 NAC #4 (Notes 1 and 3)



Releasing Solenoid

Subtotals (carry to top line of Part 2)

N/A

N/A

N/A

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

N/A

N/A

N/A

[ ] x [0.040]= x [0.040]= x [0.002]= x [0.025]= x [0.100]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.040]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.020]= x [ ]=

N/A

N/A

N/A

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

Qty

1


Primary, Fire Alarm Current

(amps)

X [current draw]= total

X [0.240]= 0.240

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.056]= x [0.056]= x [0.018]= x [0.065]= x [0.100]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.100]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.020]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]=

Qty

1

[ ]

[ ]


Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm

Current (amps)

X [current draw]= x [0.10] x [0.025]= x [0.009]= total

0.10

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.040]= x [0.040]= x [0.002]= x [0.025]= x [0.050]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.040]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [ ]= x [0.020]= x [ ]=

Table 47 System Current Draw Calculations

(Part 1)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


129


Calculating the Battery Size

Row Category


Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Current

(amps)

Qty X [current draw]= total Qty


Primary, Fire Alarm Current

(amps)

X [current draw]= total Qty


Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm

Current (amps)

X [current draw]= total

SUBTOTALS FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

11

SLC Communication Loop

B501BH (Horn in base)

CMX-2 (relay/NAC)

FCM-1 (Supervised NAC)

DHX-501

DHX-502

FZM-1 (IDC) (SLC Current)

CPX-551

CPX-751

FSI-751

ISO-X

NBG-12LX (with FSM-101)

BGX-101L (with MMX-101)

FMM-1 (IDC)

FMM-101 (IDC)

MMX-1 (IDC)

MMX-2 (IDC)(SLC current)

MMX-101 (IDC)

IPX-751

FSP-751T

FSP-751

HPX-751

SDX-551

SDX-751

SDX-551TH

SDX-751TH

FRM-1

FDX-551 and FDX-551R

XP5-M

XP5-C (Relay)

XP5-C (NAC/Telephone)

FST-751

B524RB

B524BI

12 CHG-120

13 Optional modules

RTM-8 (Note 4)

4XTM

Municipal Box (Note 5)

Reverse Polarity Outputs used

14 Compatible Devices not listed above

(Note 3)

15 Sum each column for totals

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [0.00100]=

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00027

X 0.00045

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00030

X 0.00035

X 0.00027

X 0.00027

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.001651

X 0.000840

X 0.001481

X 0.00027

X 0.00050

X 0.00050

x [0.01500]=

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00027

X 0.00045

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00030

X 0.00035

X 0.00027

X 0.00027

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.003000

X 0.000840

X 0.001481

X 0.00027

X 0.00050

X 0.00050

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ 0.0010]= x [ 0.0110]=

N/A x [ 0.0050]= [ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ ]= x [ ]=

Primary non-alarm:

(1.0 A max.):

[ ]

[ ] x [ 0.160]= x [ 0.020]= x [ ]= x [ 0.0050]= [ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ ]= x [ ]=

Primary alarm (5.0 A max): Copy to

Table 48 “Secondary Alarm Load”

[ ]

[ ] x [ 0.0010]= x [ 0.0110]=

N/A x [ 0.0050]= [ ]

[ ]

[ ] x [ ]= x [ ]=

Secondary alarm:

Copy to Table 48 “Secondary

Standby load”

Table 47 System Current Draw Calculations

(Part 2)

x [0.00100]=

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.00027

X 0.00045

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00030

X 0.00020

X 0.00030

X 0.00035

X 0.00027

X 0.00027

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00029

X 0.00020

X 0.00020

X 0.001651

X 0.000840

X 0.001481

X 0.00027

X 0.00050

X 0.00050

x [0.060]=

A.5 Calculating the Battery Size

Use Table 48 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours (AH). This total load determines the battery size (in AH), required to support the control panel under the loss of AC power. Complete Table 48 as follows:

1. Enter the totals from Table 47 Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where shown.

2. Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times (refer to “NFPA Battery Requirements” below.)

3. Calculate the ampere hours for Standby and Alarm; then, sum the Standby and

Alarm ampere hours.

4. Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1.2 to get the proper battery size (in ampere hours).

5. Write the ampere-hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located inside

130


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Selecting and Locating Batteries

Power Supply Calculations the cabinet door.

Secondary Standby Load (total from Table 47 Calculation

Column 3)

[ ]

Primary Alarm Load (total from

Table 47 Calculation Column 2)

[ ]

Required Standby Time

(24 or 60 hours) x [ ]

Required Alarm Time

(For 5 min., enter 0.084, for 10 min., enter 0.168) x [ ]

AVPS-24/APS-6R Alarm Load

(if using AVPS-24, enter 3.0 A, if using APS-6R enter 6.0 A)

Required Alarm Time

(For 5 min., enter 0.084, for 10 min., enter 0.168) x [ ]

[ ]

Sum of Standby and Alarm Ampere Hours

Multiply by the Derating Factor

Battery Size, Total Ampere Hours Required

= AH

= AH

= AH

= AH x 1.2

= AH

Table 48 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC

A.6 Selecting and Locating Batteries

Select batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated (Table 47 on pages 129-130). The control panel can charge batteries in the 7 AH to 18 AH range.

Table 49 contains information, such as the battery size and location, for the batteries required to power the control panel if an AC power loss occurs.

Note: 15 AH to 18 AH batteries require the BB-17 or other UL-listed external battery cabinet.

Battery

Size

Voltage

Rating

Number

Required

Part Number Location

7 AH *

12 AH

12 volts

12 volts two two

18 AH 12 volts two

* Maximum alarm load on 7 AH battery is 2.5 Amps

PS-1270

PS-12120

PS-12180

Table 49 Battery Size and Location

In control panel backbox

BB-17 Battery Box

A.7 NFPA Battery Requirements

• NFPA 72 Local and NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm.

• NFPA 72 Central Station, NFPA 72 Auxiliary, and NFPA 72 Remote Station require 60 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm. Batteries installed in a system powered by a generator need to provide at least 4 hours of standby power. If sizing battery for 4 hour standby use a derating factor of 1.5

• NFPA 12, 12A, 12B require 24 hours plus 5 minutes activation. The total ampere hours required cannot exceed 18 AH with an internal charger.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


131

NFPA Applications

Section Overview

Appendix B NFPA Applications

B.1 Section Overview

B.1.1 Specific Requirements

The control panel is designed for use in commercial, industrial, and institutional applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) Standards outlined in this appendix. The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate NFPA standard are listed below.

• AFP-200 control panel containing the main circuit board, cabinet (backbox and door), main supply transformer and power supply.

• Batteries (refer to Appendix A for standby power requirements).

• Initiating devices connected to the control panel’s signaling line circuit.

• Notification appliances connected to the control panel’s Notification Appliance

Circuit or via a control module.

B.1.2 Additional Requirements

Table 50 contains additional equipment that is needed for compliance with the NFPA standards listed below:

NFPA Standard

NFPA 72 Central

Station Fire Alarm

Systems

(Protected

Premises Unit)

NFPA 72 Auxiliary

Fire Alarm System

NFPA 72 Remote

Station Fire Alarm

System

NFPA 72

Proprietary Fire

Alarm System

Application

DACT


Communicator/Transmitter or Notifier 911AC

DACT for connection to a compatible

UL-listed Central Station DACR or Protected

Premises Receiving Unit.

RTM-8

Relay Transmitter Module or 4XTM

Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible UL-listed Local Energy Municipal

Box.

RTM-8

Relay Transmitter Module or 4XTM

Transmitter Module for connection to the

Fire•Lite RS-82 Remote Station Receiver. or

UDACT


Communicator/Transmitter or Notifier 911AC

DACT for connection to a compatible

UL-listed remote station DACR.

NIB-96

Network Interface Board. The

NIB-96 must be installed in the receiving system.

Refer to

“Central Station Fire

Alarm Systems

(Protected Premises)” on page 133

“NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire

Alarm System” on page

135

“Wiring a Remote Station

Fire Alarm System” on page 136

“Installing a UDACT” on page 134 and “Installing a Notifier 911AC” on page 133.

“NFPA 72 Proprietary

Fire Alarm Systems” on page 138 and the NIB-96

Manual, Document

15666.

Table 50 Additional Equipment for NFPA Applications

132


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises)

NFPA Applications

B.2 Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises)

B.2.1 Installing a Notifier 911AC

The Notifier 911AC for connection to a Central Station Receiver or Protected Premises

Receiving Unit must be installed as shown in Figure 129. For additional information on the 911AC, refer to Document 74-06200-005. The 911AC communicator comes in a separate cabinet. All connections from the 911AC cabinet must be in conduit, less than 20 feet (6.096 m) in length in the same room.

NotiFire 911AC

Digital Communicator

AFP-200

To Central Station

Alarm normally open contacts

Trouble normally open contacts

Supervisory normally open contacts

AFP-200

TB3 Term. 3

TB3 Term. 5

TB3 Term. 6

TB3 Term. 8

TB3 Term. 1

TB3 Term. 2

911AC

6 and 7

8 and 9

10

11

12

11

Figure 129 911AC Installation

Note:

1. Set SW3 on the control panel circuit board to “TBL LESS AC” (downward) position. This delays the reporting of an AC fail condition for approximately

8 hours to comply with the 1993 UL standards. SW3 is located on the right center of the CPU board (Figure 3 on page 17).

2. All input and output connections are inherently low voltage and power-limited.

Use UL-listed, power-limited cable only.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


133

NFPA Applications

Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises)

B.2.2 Installing a UDACT

Figure 130 shows typical connections for wiring a UDACT to the control panel. For detailed wiring, configuration, and programming instructions for the UDACT, refer to the UDACT manual. When finished installation, review the checklist below.

Note: This application requires compatible system software—the UDACT must have software PN 73624 or higher and the control panel must have software PN 73609 or higher. Also, add the UDACT current into the control panel power supply calculations

(refer to Appendix A “Power Supply Calculations”). supervised and power-limited

EIA-485 and power wiring

Note: If this is the last or only device on the line, install a 120 ohm end-of-line resistor (PN 71244) on TB1 terminals 3 and 4 as shown.

+24V

GND

RS+

RS-

SHIELD

RS+

RS-

3

4

1

2

5

6

7 to phone lines

(supervised)

TB1 solid earth ground connection

T

B

1

+ -

1

2

3

4 5

+ - + - + -

6

T

B

2

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- B+ B-

T

B

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NO C N0 NC C N0 NC C

JP8

JP8

T

B

4

1 2 3 4

TX REF RX REF

T

B

5

+

1 2

-

3 4

+

-

OUT OUT IN IN

T

B

6

1

2 3 4 5 6

Ferrite

Cores

PN 29090

J8

AFP-200

ANALOG FIRE PANEL

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL

12:00 FRI 8/14/92

J9

+24V

GND

RS+

RS-

SHIELD

RS+

RS-

TB1

PRIMARY ACTIVE

PH1 PH2

TB3

EARTH

GND

COMM

FAIL

+24V

SECONDARY

ACTIVE

134

AC POWER

FIRE

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

WARNING

SUPERVISORY

SECURITY

ALARM

SILENCED

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCE

EVACUATE

HOLD 2 SECONDS

SYSTEM RESET

J5

TEST

CONNECTOR

AFP-200

AFP-200

Cabinet

Afp200ab

UDACT in ABS-8R

(shown with cover removed)

SW2

ACS TERM

TERM

ACS

ACS/TERM switch

Figure 130 NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm System – UDACT

(Protected Premises Unit)

To install a UDACT to the control panel, follow these steps. Check that all items are answered before powering the UDACT or control panel:

1. Is the UDACT connected to non-resettable 24 VDC power on the control panel

[TB1, terminal 3 (+) and terminal 4 (–)] with correct polarity (Figure 130)?

2. Is the UDACT connected to the EIA-485 port on the control panel, [TB5, terminal

1 (+) and terminal 2 (–)] with correct polarity (Figure 130)?

3. Is the UDACT ACS/TERM switch set to the ACS (left) position (Figure 130)?

4. Is the UDACT Start Monitor Address set to 1 and is the Stop Monitor Address set

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System

NFPA Applications to 2 (refer to the UDACT manual)?

5. Is the ACS/ TERM switch (SW2) on the control panel set to the ACS position?

6. Is the control panel programmed for “ANNUN=UDACT”?

7. Is the control panel configured for proper supervision? Supervise the UDACT via the COMM FAIL output (refer to Monitoring for UDACT Trouble in the UDACT

Manual)?

• For a system without an annunciator – configure the UDACT for

Receive/Transmit

.

• For a system with an annunciator – configure the UDACT for

Receive Only

and the annunciator for

Receive/Transmit

.

Note: If the annunciator does not require remote control capabilities (Reset,

Acknowledge, Silence, etc.), 'COMM FAIL' monitoring is not required if the following conditions are met: the UDACT is configured for “Receive/Transmit”

and

the annunciator is configured for “Receive Only”.

B.3 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System

Figure 131 and 131 show typical connections (all connections are nonpower-limited and supervised) for wiring the control panel to a municipal box. Maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to Municipal Box is 5 ohms. Cut JP5 on control panel circuit board. This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions.

RTM-8 Module

Gamewell Model M34-56


Jumper JP2 must be in the LE MUNCPL BOX position for use in this application

Municipal Box Circuit

Polarities shown in alarm condition

Figure 131 Wiring a Municipal Box Connected to a RTM-8

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


135

NFPA Applications

4XTM Transmitter Module

(activated position shown)

Wiring a Remote Station Fire Alarm System

Gamewell Model M34-56


Municipal Box Circuit

Figure 132 Wiring a Municipal Box Connected to a 4XTM

B.4 Wiring a Remote Station Fire Alarm System

B.4.1 Overview

The NFPA Remote Station Fire Alarm System standard is intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving unit having compatible ratings.

All connections are power-limited and supervised with the exception of the reverse polarity loop (loop supervision is the responsibility of the receiver unit). This section shows typical applications for wiring a remote station fire alarm system (a Fire•Lite

RS-82 Remote Station Receiver Unit) using a 4XTM module (Figure 133) and using an

RTM-8 (Figure 134).

Note: For remote station fire alarm systems, cut Jumper JP5 on the control panel CPU board. For additional information on the RS-82 Remote Station Receiver Unit, refer to the Fire•Lite Alarms, Inc. RS-82 Instruction Manual.

136


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Wiring a Remote Station Fire Alarm System

NFPA Applications

B.4.2 Using a 4XTM Module

Figure 133 shows typical connections for wiring the control panel to remote station fire alarm system using a 4XTM module.

4XTM

Transmitter Module

(activated polarities shown)

Remote

Station Master

Remote

Trouble

Remote

Alarm

Bell or

Horn

Input 6

Alarm

Signal

Input 7

Alarm

Signal

Input 8

Alarm

Signal

Input 9

Alarm

Signal

Input 3

Alarm

Signal

Input 4

Alarm

Signal

Input 5

Alarm

Signal

Polarity shown is for normal standby.

RS82to4XTM.cdr

Figure 133 NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm System

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


137

NFPA Applications

NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

B.4.3 Using an RTM-8 Module

Figure 134 shows typical wiring for an RTM-8 module to a UL-listed Fire•Lite RS-82

Remote Station Receiver. For this application, note the following:

• RTM-8 jumper JP2 must be in position AL/TR REV. POL. for use in alarm and trouble transmission

or

AL ONLY for alarm transmission only.

• For additional information on the RS-82, refer to the Fire•Lite Alarms, Inc. RS-82

Instruction Manual.

• The RTM-8 is not suitable for separate transmission of both alarm and trouble signals to a remote station.

• Cut jumper JP5 on control panel CPU board.

Fire•Lite RS-82 Remote Station Receiver

Polarity Shown is Non-Alarm

JP1

Jumper Settings:

Alarm/Trouble Polarity

Reversal

Remote Station

JP1 must be cut

Alarm only Polarity Reversal

Remote Station

JP1 must be cut

JP2

Polarity Shown is Non-Alarm

RTM-8 Relay Transmitter Module

Figure 134 Remote Station Connections Using an RTM-8 Module

B.5 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

Figure 135 shows typical connections between an AFP-200 control panel and receiving unit (NIB-96 in an AM2020) for a proprietary fire alarm application. Table 51 lists wiring connections for the NIB-96, AM2020, and AFP-200.

• Program the AFP-200 for ACS annunciation mode and set switch (SW2) on the

CPU board for ACS mode. The ACS interface will automatically transmit General

Alarm, General Trouble and General Supervisory signals and will receive

Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset commands automatically from the

AM2020/AFP1010 control panel. Zone alarm and zone trouble information may be transmitted by programming the AFP-200 points to software zones 1 through

88.

• Up to ten AFP-200 Protected Premises Units may be monitored by one

AM2020/AFP1010 Receiving Unit using ten SLC loops and ten NIB-96 modules.

• Disable the ground fault circuit on the AFP-200 by cutting jumper JP9 because the

138


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

NFPA Applications

AM2020/AFP1010 performs ground fault protection for the control panel circuits.

• If connecting an RPT-485W isolating repeater module between the

AM2020/AFP1010 and the control panel, a common connection between the two panels is not needed. However—a system common connection must be made from the AFP-200 to RPT-485W,

and

the AFP-200 ground fault jumper JP9 should not be cut.

• For Receiving Unit installation and programming, refer to the AM2020/AFP1010 manual and the NIB-96 manual.

NIB-96

EIA-485 two-wire loop (Style 4), twisted pair

(power-limited and supervised)

TB3

MPS-24A/

MPS=24AE

AM2020/AFP1010 Receiving Unit

System

Common

T

B

1

T

B

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T

B

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

JP 8

JP8

T

B

4

TX REF RX RE F

T

B

5

OU T OU T IN IN

T

B

6

1 2 3 4 5 6

AC POWER

ALARM

ACKNO WLEDGE

STEP

ALARM

SILENCED

SYS TEM RESET

AFP-200 Protected

Premises Unit

JP1

Figure 135

NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

EIA-485 (+)

EIA-485 (–)

System Common

NIB-96

P4 Term. 5

P4 Term. 3

AFP-200

TB5 Term. 1

TB5 Term. 2

TB1 Term. 6

MPS-24A

TB3 Term. 6

Table 51 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Wiring Connections

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


139

Annunciators

LCD-80 Display

Appendix C Annunciators

C.1 LCD-80 Display

The LCD-80 alphanumeric display module is an AFP-200 ancillary device that provides two modes of operation: Terminal Mode, where the LCD-80 acts as a display repeater; and ACS Mode, where the LCD-80 acts as an alphanumeric annunciator. To select the operation mode, use switch SW2 on the CPU (Figure 3 on page 17). The

LCD-80 features the following:

• 80-character LCD display that backlights under normal and alarm conditions

• Control switches for Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset, all made operational by an optional AKS-1 switch

• Time and date display field

• Annunciator backbox ABF-1 package with optional AKS-1 key switch and phone jack options

• Remote operation (mounts up to 6,000 feet (1828.8 m) from the control panel)

• Local panel sounder with alarm/trouble resound

C.1.1 ACS Mode

ACS Mode, which requires programming the LCD-80, provides a remote or local digital display and a printer interface for the control panel and provides the following features:

• General status banner

• 40 character custom label

• Step Display and Time/Date/Set switches

• Custom “normal” message

• Alarm and trouble count

• First alarm/last alarm/alarm count

(European option)

• Field-programmable messages

(available in English and all foreign language versions)

• Field programmable, nonvolatile memory in two options (128 points,

40-character labels or 256 points,

20-character labels)

• Internal nonvolatile clock

C.1.2 Terminal Mode

Terminal Mode, which does not require any programming, offers the following features: Device type identifiers from control panel; device and zone custom alphanumeric labels from control panel, and time/date and device address from control panel.

C.2 Terminal Mode (LCD-80) Annunciation Interface (TB5 on CPU)

In Terminal mode, the control panel annunciates all point information to remote

LCD-80 displays. Each LCD-80 mirrors the control panel LCD display and includes

Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset switches. An LCD-80 will display all 198 intelligent points without being programmed. Switch SW2 on the CPU board must be set for

TERM and the control panel must be programmed for Terminal mode.

140


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

ACS Annunciation Interface (TB5 on CPU)

Annunciators

C.3 ACS Annunciation Interface (TB5 on CPU)

In ACS mode, the control panel annunciates its 99 software zones. The use of software zones lets you map any number of modules or detectors to a single LED. The ACS connection uses a standard EIA-485 interface, capable of two-way, high speed communications with multiple annunciators located up to 6,000 ft. from the control panel.

Canadian Requirement: The ACM Series annunciator modules must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only. For Canadian applications, the following LED colors must be employed:

• Red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs

• Yellow must be used to indicate supervisory, burglary or trouble signals

• Green must be used to indicate the presence of power or an activated output

C.3.1 Supported Modules

When programmed for ACS mode, the control panel will support the following

ACS-compatible modules:

• Point annunciators

ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT

AFM-16A, AFM-32A, AFM-16AT

ACM-32A, AEM-32A

LDM-32, LDM-E32, LDM-R32

•

ACM-8R

– This module may be used to increase the relay capacity of the control panel by providing mappable dry contact relays. The control panel can support 99 detectors, 99 modules, four Notification Appliance Circuits, eight internal relays, and 99 external relays, for a total of over 300 points. The ACM-8R may be powered by the regulated/high-ripple notification appliance power from the control panel. For detailed information, refer to ACM-8R manual.

Note: Similar point capacity extension is possible using the LDM-R32, but the LDM-32 series must use filtered, regulated power and is therefore more limited than the ACM-8R.

•

LCD-80

– The LCD-80 must be set to ACS mode (refer to the LCD-80 manual).

C.4 Annunciator Capacity

ACS annunciation displays the 99 software zones of the control panel plus 8 system points, for a total of 107. Information is transmitted using annunciator addresses 1 and

2. The EIA-485 interface will allow up to 32 annunciators (all but two must be in receive-only mode), over distances of up to 6,000 feet (1828.8 m) subject to system power limitations.

C.4.1 Data Formats for Annunciator Address 1

Table 52 contains the data formats available at annunciator address 1. Note the following:

1. The use of a UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter and an

ACM, AFM or LDM Series Annunciator on the same control panel alters the assignments of the yellow LEDs on ACS Points 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

2. Assignments with the UDACT are Point 3=Program Mode, Point 4=Supervisory,

Point 5=Bell Trouble, Point 6=Prealarm/Maintenance Alert, Point 7=Low Battery and Point 8=AC Fail.

C.4.2 Data Formats at Annunciator Address 2

Table 53 contains the data formats for annunciator address 2. Note the following:

1. The National Standard of Canada (CAN/ULC-5527) requires a dedicated display to use yellow visual indicators to show the status of supervisory inputs. Notifier annunciators intended for Canadian Supervisory Service are: ACM-16ATCS4,

ACM-16ATCS, ACM-16ATY, ACM-32ACS8, ACM-32ACS, and ACM-32AY.

2. On address 2, LED number = point number – 56

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


141

Annunciators

Annunciator Capacity

142

ACS Point no.

1

I/O

Input

Red LED

System Alarm

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

46

47

48

49

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

54

55

56

57

50

51

52

53

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Z42 Active

Z43 Active

Z44 Active

Z45 Active

Z46 Active

Z47 Active

Z48 Active

Z49 Active

58

59

60

61

Input

Input

Input

Input

Z50 Active

Z51 Active

Z52 Active

Z53 Active

62

63

Input

Input

Z54 Active

Z55 Active

64 Input Z56 Active

Note: 1 System Trouble excludes AC Power Fail.

Z26 Active

Z27 Active

Z28 Active

Z29 Active

Z30 Active

Z31 Active

Z32 Active

Z33 Active

Z34 Active

Z35 Active

Z36 Active

Z37 Active

Z38 Active

Z39 Active

Z40 Active

Z41 Active

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Output

Output

Output

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Z10 Active

Z11 Active

Z12 Active

Z13 Active

Z14 Active

Z15 Active

Z16 Active

Z17 Active

Z18 Active

Z19 Active

Z20 Active

Z21 Active

Z22 Active

Z23 Active

Z24 Active

Z25 Active

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Z1 Active

Z2 Active

Z3 Active

Z4 Active

Z5 Active

Z6 Active

Z7 Active

Z8 Active

Z9 Active

Yellow LED with UDACT

System Trouble

1

Signals Silenced

Program Mode

Supervisory

Bell Trouble

Pre-Alarm/Maint. Alert

Low Battery

AC Fail

Table 52 Data Formats at Annunciator Address 1

Z38 Trouble

Z39 Trouble

Z40 Trouble

Z41 Trouble

Z42 Trouble

Z43 Trouble

Z44 Trouble

Z45 Trouble

Z46 Trouble

Z47 Trouble

Z48 Trouble

Z49 Trouble

Z50 Trouble

Z51 Trouble

Z52 Trouble

Z53 Trouble

Z54 Trouble

Z55 Trouble

Z56 Trouble

Z22 Trouble

Z23 Trouble

Z24 Trouble

Z25 Trouble

Z26 Trouble

Z27 Trouble

Z28 Trouble

Z29 Trouble

Z30 Trouble

Z31 Trouble

Z32 Trouble

Z33 Trouble

Z34 Trouble

Z35 Trouble

Z36 Trouble

Z37 Trouble

Z6 Trouble

Z7 Trouble

Z8 Trouble

Z9 Trouble

Z10 Trouble

Z11 Trouble

Z12 Trouble

Z13 Trouble

Z14 Trouble

Z15 Trouble

Z16 Trouble

Z17 Trouble

Z18 Trouble

Z19 Trouble

Z20 Trouble

Z21 Trouble

Yellow LED

System Trouble

1

Signals Silenced

Not used

Not used

Supervisory

Pre-Alarm

Panel trouble

AC Fail

Z1 Trouble

Z2 Trouble

Z3 Trouble

Z4 Trouble

Z5 Trouble

Switch

Acknowledge

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Signal Silence

System Reset

Drill

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Comments

See Note 1

Panel Supervisory LED on

Trouble

Trouble

Battery/Earth Trouble

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Annunciator Capacity

Annunciators

60

61

62

63

64

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

ACS Point #

1

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Z88 Active

Z89 Active

Z90 Active

Z91 Active

Z92 Active

Z93 Active

Z94 Active

Z95 Active

Z96 Active

Z97 Active

Z98 Active

Z99 Active

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Z72 Active

Z73 Active

Z74 Active

Z75 Active

Z76 Active

Z77 Active

Z78 Active

Z79 Active

Z80 Active

Z81 Active

Z82 Active

Z83 Active

Z84 Active

Z85 Active

Z86 Active

Z87 Active

Red LED

Z57 Active

Z58 Active

Z59 Active

Z60 Active

Z61 Active

Z62 Active

Z63 Active

Z64 Active

Z65 Active

Z66 Active

Z67 Active

Z68 Active

Z69 Active

Z70 Active

Z71 Active

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Z88 Trouble

Z89 Trouble

Z90 Trouble

Z91 Trouble

Z92 Trouble

Z93 Trouble

Z94 Trouble

Z95 Trouble

Z96 Trouble

Z97 Trouble

Z98 Trouble

Z99 Trouble

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Z72 Trouble

Z73 Trouble

Z74 Trouble

Z75 Trouble

Z76 Trouble

Z77 Trouble

Z78 Trouble

Z79 Trouble

Z80 Trouble

Z81 Trouble

Z82 Trouble

Z83 Trouble

Z84 Trouble

Z85 Trouble

Z86 Trouble

Z87 Trouble

Yellow LED

Z57 Trouble

Z58 Trouble

Z59 Trouble

Z60 Trouble

Z61 Trouble

Z62 Trouble

Z63 Trouble

Z64 Trouble

Z65 Trouble

Z66 Trouble

Z67 Trouble

Z68 Trouble

Z69 Trouble

Z70 Trouble

Z71 Trouble

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

I/O

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Comments

Presignal Time Run Time

Started/Release Time




Time Control Active

Time Control Active

Holiday Active

Tornado Active

Pre-Alarm Active

Table 53 Data Formats at Annunciator Address 2

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Switch

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


143

Annunciators

Terminal Mode EIA-485 Connections (TB5)

C.5 Terminal Mode EIA-485 Connections (TB5)

Refer to the LCD-80 Manual for additional information.

This section shows how to install LCD-80s set for Terminal Mode to the control panel, subject to the following:

•

Maximum number of LCD-80s allowed

– A maximum of four LCD-80s may be connected when powered by the control panel. If, however, the LCD-80s are powered by a separate UL-listed power supply, up to 32 may be connected.

•

Maximum distance

– There is a 6,000 foot (1828.8 m) maximum distance (16

AWG) between the control panel and the first or last LCD-80 and between each

LCD-80.

•

Cable

– Use overall foil/braided-shield twisted-pair cable suitable for EIA-485 applications.

•

Circuit rating

– The EIA-485 circuit is rated 5.5 VDC max., 60 mA max. For non-English language systems, LCD-80 standby current is the same as the alarm current (100 mA).

Connect the EIA-485 circuit as follows:

1. Connect each LCD-80 to 24 VDC operating power (power-limited and supervised) to the AFP-200 as shown in Figure 139 on page 146.

2. Set SW2 on the control panel to the TERM position (left position).

3. Set SW4 and SW5 on the LCD-80 to the TERM position: SW1-7 ON.

4. Install R-120 resistors across the in and out terminals of each LCD-80 as shown in

Figure 136.

First LCD-80

– must set DIP

Switch SW3-1 AND SW3-2 “OFF” on all LCD-80s except the last one.

first LCD-80

EIA-485 In (–)

EIA-485 Out (–)

EIA-485 In (+)

EIA-485 Out (+)

P2

EIA-485 out

EIA-485 return

Last LCD-80

– SW3-1 and

SW3-2 must be set ON on the last LCD-80.

last LCD-80

EIA-485 In (–)

EIA-485 Out (–)

EIA-485 In (+)

EIA-485 Out (+)

P2

shielded twisted

Out (+) r-120lcd.wmf

Install R-120 resistors across the in and out terminals of each LCD-80

TB5-1 (+)

TB5-2 (–)

Figure 136 Terminal Mode EIA-485 Connection

144


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

LCD-80 ACS Mode EIA-485 Connections

Annunciators

C.6 LCD-80 ACS Mode EIA-485 Connections

Refer to the LCD-80 Manual for additional information.

This section shows how to install LCD-80s set to ACS Mode to the control panel, subject to the following:

•

Maximum number of LCD-80s allowed

– A maximum of four LCD-80s may be connected when powered by the control panel. If, however, the LCD-80s are powered by a separate UL-listed power supply, up to 32 may be connected.

•



AWG) between the control panel and the first or last LCD-80 and between each

LCD-80.

•

Cable

– Use overall foil/braided-shield twisted pair cable with a characteristic impedance of approximately 120 ohms.

•

Circuit rating

– The EIA-485 circuit is rated 5.5 VDC max., 60 mA max.

•

Connections

– All connections are power-limited and supervised.

This section shows how to install LCD-80s set to ACS Mode to the control panel, subject to the following:


1. Connect each LCD-80 to 24 VDC operating power (power-limited and supervised) to the AFP-200 as shown in Figure 139 on page 146.

2. Set SW2 on the control panel to the “ACS” position (right position).

3. Set the LCD-80 start address to 01.

4. On the LCD-80, set switch SW2 to “1”, and set SW3-1 and SW3-2 to “OFF”.

5. Set the LCD-80 to a size of 128 points.

6. To use a 40-character display; set SW5 OFF and SW6 ON. To use a 20-character display; set SW5 ON and SW6 OFF.

EIA-485 In (–)

EIA-485 Out (–)

EIA-485 In (+)

EIA-485 Out (+)

Install 120 ohm terminating resistor on last LCD-80

last LCD-80

P2 first LCD-80

EIA-485 In (–)

EIA-485 Out (–)

EIA-485 In (+)

EIA-485 Out (+)

P2

TB5-1 (+)

TB5-2 (–)

Figure 137 LCD-80 ACS Mode EIA-485 Connection

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


145

Annunciators

Power Connections for LCD and ACS Series Annunciators

C.7 Power Connections for LCD and ACS Series Annunciators

This section shows how to wire power connections for ACS and LCD series annunciators. Note the following when making power connections:

• All connections are power-limited.

• The power run to the LCD-80 or ACS annunciator does not require a Power

Supervision Relay because the loss of power is inherently supervised through communication loss.

• The maximum LCD-80 current draw from power supply is 500 mA.

Figure 139 shows typical power wiring for ACS and LDM series annunciators:

The ACM-8R does not contain terminals 6 and 7.

7) N.C. Trouble

6) Inputs

5) Common in (–)

4) Common out (–)

3) Power In (+24 VDC)

2) Power Out (+24 VDC)

1) Earth Ground

TB1-3 (+)

TB1-4 (–)

Afp2annu

Figure 138 Power Connections for LDM and ACS Series Annunciators

Figure 140 shows typical power wiring for LCD-80 series annunciators:

EIA-232 Transmit

EIA-232 Reference

- System Common OUT

- System Common IN

+24 VDC OUT

+24 VDC IN

EIA-232 Receive

EIA-232 Transmit

EIA-232 Reference

- System Common OUT

- System Common IN

+24 VDC OUT

+24 VDC IN

EIA-232 Receive

146

TB1-3 (+)

TB1-4 (–)

Figure 139 Power Connections for LCD-80 Series Annunciators

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


ACS and LDM Series EIA-485 Connections

Annunciators

C.8 ACS and LDM Series EIA-485 Connections

Refer to the LDM and ACS manuals for additional information.

This section shows how to connect ACS and LDM series annunciators to the control panel, subject to the following:

•

Maximum number allowed

– A maximum of 10 point annunciators (such as

ACM, LDM, AFM) can be connected to this circuit when powered by the control panel.

•



AWG) between the control panel and the furthest annunciator.

•

Cable

– Use twisted pair cable with a characteristic impedance of approximately

120 ohms.

•

Circuit rating

– The EIA-485 circuit is rated 5.5 VDC max., 60 mA max.

•

Connections

– All connections are power-limited and supervised.


1. Connect each annunciator to 24 VDC operating power (power-limited and supervised) to the AFP-200 as shown in Figure 139 on page 146.

2. Set SW2 on the control panel to the “ACS” position (right position).

Install 120 ohm terminating resistor on last annunciator.

TB2

TB5-1 (+)

TB5-2 (–)

TB2

EIA-485 In (–)

EIA-485 Out (–)

EIA-485 Out (+)

EIA-485 In (+)

Figure 140 ACS and LDM Series EIA-485 Connection

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


147

Releasing Applications

Appendix D Releasing Applications

NFPA Standards

D.1 NFPA Standards

The control panel can be used for agent release or preaction/deluge control applications. When used with compatible, UL-listed actuating and initiating devices, the control panel meets the requirements of the NFPA standards listed in Table 54:

!

WARNING: When used for CO

2

releasing applications, observe proper precautions as stated in NFPA12. Do not enter the protected space unless physical lockout and other safety procedures are fully completed. Do not use software disable functions in the panel as lockout.

!

WARNING: Use only SLC control module outputs for agent releasing applications.

NFPA 12

NFPA 12A

NFPA 12B

NFPA 13

NFPA 15

NFPA 16

NFPA 17

NFPA 17A

NFPA 2001

CO

2

Extinguishing Systems (high pressure only)

Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems

Halon 1211 Extinguishing Systems

Sprinkler Systems

Water Spray Systems

Foam-water Deluge and Foam-water Spray Systems

Dry Chemical Extinguishing systems

Wet Chemical Extinguishing systems

Clean Agent Extinguishing systems

Table 54 NFPA Standards for Releasing Applications

D.2 Programming Releasing Zones

The control panel includes four software releasing zones (zones 91, 92, 93 and 94) used to control releasing functions. Each releasing zone operates independently, and is fully programmable. Program releasing zones from the Releasing Zone screen (Figure 141).

To display the Release Control screen, select 91-94 from the Special Zone Program

Change screen.

Status banner

Delay timer selection

Abort timer selection

(see Table 57)

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

RELEASE@CONTROL

DELAY=XX@ABORT=XXX

CROSS=N@SOAK=XX@Z91

Cross Zoning selection

(see Table 55)

Releasing zone

Soak timer selection

Figure 141 Release Control Screen

148


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Programming Releasing Zones


D.2.1 Releasing Zone Functions

Releasing zone functions include the following:

• Delay Timer

• Abort Timer

• Cross Zone

• Soak Timer

D.2.2 Delay Timer

A Delay Timer lets you program a delay time (0-60 seconds; 00=no delay timer) for output devices mapped to a releasing zone. In Figure 142 for example, SLC control modules M01 and M02 are mapped to releasing zone Z91. If Z91 is programmed for a delay time of 30 seconds, M01 an M02 do not activate until 30 seconds after Z91 activates.

M01 M02

PROGRM RELEASE CKT

Z91 Z Z Z Z

** M02

PROGRM RELEASE CKT

Z91 Z Z Z Z

** M01

Z91

PROGRM SMOKE (ION)

Z91 Z Z Z Z

*P* D01

Figure 142 Mapped Devices to a Releasing Zone

When using a Delay Timer, note the following:

• If cross-zoning is selected for the releasing zone, the delay timer starts when two or more devices are in alarm (for more information, refer to “Cross Zoning”).

• If abort or manual release type monitor modules are mapped to this zone they affect the timer operation as described in “Abort Timer”.

D.2.3 Cross Zoning

Cross Zoning lets you program the control panel to activate a releasing zone and any output mapped to the releasing zone. (If not using Cross Zoning, set CROSS= to N.)

Table 55 summarizes the types of cross zoning and the conditions for activating a releasing zone and Table 56 shows an example of a cross zoning application.

Type

Y

Z

H

Activates when...

Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to one of the four releasing zones

(Z91-Z94).

Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to two different software zones and mapped to one of the four releasing zones (Z91-Z94).

At least one smoke detector mapped to one of the four releasing zones (Z91-Z94) is alarmed

and

at least one heat detector mapped to one of the four releasing zones

(Z91-Z94) is alarmed.

Table 55 Cross Zoning Types

Note: Only the first non-special zone listed in the zone map is used to determine

Cross=Z.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


149



Table 56 contains examples of devices mapped to releasing zones:

Device Address Device Type

D01

D02

D03

D04

M01

Detector Smoke

Detector Smoke

Detector Smoke

Detector Heat

SLC Control Module connected to a releasing circuit (Rel Ckt)

Zone Mapping

Z91 Z02

Z91 Z02

Z91 Z03

Z91 Z03

Z91

Table 56 Example: Devices Mapped to Releasing Zones

The following explanations apply to the examples listed in Table 56:

•

Cross=N

– An alarm from any detector activates the releasing module circuit.

•

Cross=Y

– An alarm from any two detectors in the system activates the releasing module circuit.

•

Cross=Z

– Release requires the activation of two detectors mapped to different zones: D01 and D02 cannot activate the releasing module circuit because both detectors are mapped to the same zones; D01 and D03 can activate the releasing module circuit because they are mapped to different zones.

•

Cross=H

– Release requires activation of heat detector D04 and one smoke detector (D01, D02, or D03).

D.2.4 Soak Timer (NFPA 16 Applications Only)

The Soak Timer specifies the length of time (10 to 15 minutes) to dump release agents when a releasing zone activates. When the Soak Timer elapses, the control panel automatically shuts off the releasing solenoids for the active releasing zone. To program a Soak Timer, follow these instructions:

1. Select Soak on the Release Control Screen, move the cursor to the Soak value as shown in Figure 143:

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

RELEASE@CONTROL

DELAY=XX@ABORT=XXX

CROSS=N@SOAK=00@Z91

Soak Timer Value = 10 to 15 minutes

(00=no Soak Timer)

Figure 143 Soak Timer Selection

2. Enter a value for the Soak Timer: 00=no Soak Timer; or 10-15 minutes to select the amount of time for the Soak Timer.

150


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



D.2.5 Abort Timer

Description:

Abort is the type of abort algorithm used by the releasing zone. There are four types of

Abort Timers: ULI, IRI, NYC or AHJ. Table 57 contains descriptions of each Abort

Timer:

Type of Abort

Timer

Description

ULI

IRI

NYC

AHJ

This is a standard UL-type delay timer which continues to count down upon

ABORT, and stops and holds at 10 seconds until release of the Abort switch. Upon release of the Abort switch, the delay timer resumes the countdown at 10 seconds.

This is an IRI-type delay timer that provides all functions of a ULI timer — except the Abort switch only functions if you press and hold the Abort switch before the second zone goes into alarm.

This is a NYC-type delay timer. Pressing ABORT, once an alarm exists, changes the timer value to the time selected plus 90 seconds. The timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held.

This is a Local Jurisdiction delay timer that works as follows: Once the timer starts, pressing Abort restores the timer to its full time. The timer will not start while the Abort switch is held. Releasing the Abort switch continues the countdown, while pressing the Abort switch again restores the timer to its full value.

Notes:

• An Abort timer does not operate when timer is set for “NO DELAY”.

• ULI and IRI are the only abort timers that comply with UL Standard 864.

Table 57 Types of Abort Timers

D.2.6 Special Module Type Codes

You can program special releasing functions using four module type codes:

ABORT

SWITCH

,

MAN

.

RELEASE

,

REL CKT ULC

, and

RELEASE CKT

. Special releasing device type codes are listed below.

D.2.7 Abort Switch

Description:

Abort Switch

is a type code assigned to a monitor module which performs the abort functions described in Table 57.

Installation

: The monitor module connects to a UL-listed abort station, such as the full-time, permanent. All wiring is fully supervised, following the wiring instructions for the monitor modules (refer to Section 2 “Installation”). You can also install multiple Abort Switch modules, which provide a logical “or” function, similar to multiple conventional abort switches on a single conventional zone.

D.2.8 Man. Release

Description

:

Man Release

is a type code assigned to a monitor module which performs a manual release function.

Installation

: The monitor module connects to a UL-listed manual station, such as the

NBG-12LRA. A monitor module programmed for

Man. Release

overrides all

Abort

Switch

modules that are active and programmed to the same releasing zone.

All wiring is fully supervised, when connected according to the wiring instructions for the monitor modules in Section 2 “Installation”. You can also install multiple

Man.

Release

modules, which provide a logical “or” function, similar to multiple conventional abort switches on a single conventional zone.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


151



D.2.9 Rel Ckt ULC

Description

:

Rel Ckt ULC

is a type code assigned to an SLC control module. A device programmed with this type code activates a releasing solenoid or other releasing device as follows:

• when an initiating device programmed to the same zone activates (two devices if cross-zoning selected);

and

• when the delay timer (if used) expires;

and

• when no Abort Switch (if used) is active.

Installation

: All wiring to the releasing device, and the releasing device itself, is fully supervised and suitable for use with limited energy cable. You can program multiple

Release CKT

type codes to the same releasing zone so all devices activate when the same releasing zone becomes active.

D.2.10 Release Ckt

Description

:

Release Ckt

is a type code that operates similar to

Rel Ckt ULC

—except a

Release Ckt

device is only supervised for open circuits and ground faults. A device programmed for Release Ckt is not supervised for short circuits.

Installation

: All wiring to the releasing device, and the releasing device itself, is fully supervised. You can program multiple

Release CKT

type codes to the same releasing zone so all devices activate when the same releasing zone becomes active.

Restrictions

: Do not use this type code with the following:

• Applications requiring ULC listing or with limited energy cable.

• REL-47K (control module) with a Release Ckt type code.

D.2.11 Initiating Devices

Initiating devices include the following:

• FST intelligent heat detectors, FSP or FSI intelligent smoke detectors, or

• Conventional detection devices which are UL-listed for initiating applications and connected to monitor modules.

Multiple initiating devices can be used for the same releasing hazard by mapping them to the same releasing zone. Factory Mutual and certain local authorities having jurisdiction (LAHJ) require use of redundant wiring (NFPA 72 Style 6 or Style D) for the initiating devices in releasing applications.

D.2.12 Warning Sounders

Warning sounders are audible devices (such as bell and horns) that connect to

Notification Appliance Circuits or to control module circuits. Multiple Notification

Appliance Circuits may be activated by the same releasing hazard.

Note: If your application requires coded signals (such as Temporal, March Time, and so on), connect the warning sounder through one of the four panel Notification Appliance

Circuits—not a control module circuit.

Program a warning sounder to activate as follows:

• To activate when the delay timer starts, when the releasing device activates, or both: map the control module to the releasing zone (Z91, Z92, Z93, or Z94). If also selecting the releasing zone for cross zoning, a warning sounder only activates when two releasing zones go into alarm (refer to Table 55 on page 149). Unlike releasing solenoids, however, warning sounders do not wait for the delay timer.

• To activate when any of the initiating devices activate: map the control module to a separate zone (not Z91, Z92, Z93, or Z94) that is also mapped to all initiating devices of the hazard.

152


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Connecting Releasing Devices


D.2.13 Auxiliary Control Relay Functions

You can also use control relays for releasing applications. To do so, set control modules for dry contact operation (refer to Table 24 on page 83). Control relays can be programmed for different functions, just like warning sounders as described above.

Also, you can map RTM-8 modules or ACM-8Rs to control panel software zones to provide control functions.

D.2.14 ACS Annunciation

ACS point annunciation of releasing functions can be done by annunciating any of the software zones described above, including zones Z91, Z92, Z93, and Z94. To set ACS annunciation of individual detectors, assign each detector to a separate software zone and annunciate the zone.

D.2.15 Deluge/Pre-Action Release

Installing Deluge and/or Pre-Action applications requires a wiring configuration that maintains a minimum voltage on releasing circuits. To calculate maximum allowable resistance, use the formula shown in Figure 144:

V

D

R max

=

I

S

Where:

R max

= maximum allowable resistance of wiring

V

D

= allowable voltage drop

I s

= solenoid current

Figure 144 Formula for Calculating Maximum Resistance

Note:

• Factory Mutual requires 90 hours of standby power, Style D (Class A) wiring on all

Initiating Device Circuits and V

D

= 0.2 VDC.

• For NFPA 13 and 15 applications, the soak timer must be disabled.

• For NFPA 16 applications, the soak timer may be set to 10 or 15 minutes.

• For UL-listed and FM-approved Solenoid Release Valves, refer to the Device

Compatibility Document.

• Do not program an abort switch for deluge/pre-action applications.

D.3 Connecting Releasing Devices

This section contains typical wiring diagrams for the following releasing applications:

• Connecting a releasing device to a control panel through a control module (Figure

145 on page 154)

• Connecting the control panel to an agent release abort station (Figure 146 on page

155)

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


153


24 VDC UL-listed releasing device


D.3.1 Connecting a Releasing Device to a Control Panel through an SLC Control or Relay Module

Figure 145 shows typical connections of releasing device to the control panel to a via a control or relay module.

SLC Loop to AFP-200

TB6-5 (-)

TB6-3 (+)

Alarm polarity shown

Brown

REL-47K

Red

N.C. supervised relay contact

7

6

9

8

5

-

+

-

+

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

24 VDC power from the AFP-200

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-1 (+)

FCM-1

Power Supervision Relay A77-716B

Figure 145 Typical Connection of Releasing Device to Control Module

D.3.2 Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Releasing Abort

Station

Figure 146 shows typical connections for wiring an NBG-12LRA Agent Releasing

Abort Station to the AFP-200. All wiring for releasing circuits is supervised against opens and shorts.

When connecting this type of circuit, follow these instructions:

1. For releasing applications, use an end-of-line device (part number REL-47K) with the control module.

2. Connect the end-of-line device as shown in Figure 146.

3. Program the control module or NAC for a

Rel Ckt ULC

type code.

154


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002



NBG-12LRA

See Document 51369 for installation details.

ELR mode R-47K supervised and power-limited

Manual Abort Yellow

Violet

–

FMM-101

–

+ +

Black

Red

Manual Release

Normal

Release

Yellow

Violet

– –

FMM-101

Black

Red

+ +

AFP-200 TB1-1

+24 VDC

C.

N.C.

6

FRM-1

1

2

–

+

5

4

N.O.

SLC loop to AFP-200

TB6-5 (-)

TB6-3 (+)

24 VDC UL-listed releasing device

Brown

REL-47K end-of-line device

Red

7

FCM-1

6

1

2

3

–

+

–

4

+

Power Supervision

Relay A77-716B

24 VDC power from AFP-200

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-1 (+)

Figure 146 Typical Connections for an Agent Release-Abort Station

Note:

• For releasing applications use an end-of-line device (part number REL-47K) with the control module.

• All wiring for releasing circuits is supervised against open and shorts.

• Connect the end-of-line device as shown in Figure 146.

• Program the module or NAC for REL CKT ULC type code.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


155


XP5-M

TB6-5 (-)

TB6-3 (+)

SLC to AFP-200


SLC

Manual

Abort

47K,

1/2 w,

N-ELR

Manual

Release

Agent release pull station

(inside dotted lines)

47K,

1/2 w,

N-ELR

XP5-C

156

AFP-200

+24 VDC

TB1-1 (+)

Release Normal

FM Approved

Releasing

Device

REL-47K

Push-Button

Switch set for Relay

N.C. Power

Supervision

Relay Contact

Push-Button

Switch set for NAC

AFP-200

24 VDC

TB1-2 (-)

Power Supervision

Relay A77-716B

AFP-200

24 VDC

TB1-1 (+)

Figure 147 Employing NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station with XP5 Modules

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Overview

Combination Fire/Burglary Applications

Appendix E Combination Fire/Burglary Applications

E.1 Overview

The control panel can be used as a combination Fire/Burglary and Burglary system when installed, programmed, and operated according to the following:

Task Refer to

Install an STS-200 Door Tamper Switch Figure 148 on page 158

Wire the control panel for a security application

Figure 149 on page 159

Figure 150 on page 160 Program a Monitor Module for a security application

Configure the control panel keypad for a security application

Figure 150 on page 160

Table 58 Security Application Requirements

Notes for Table 58:

1. The control panel uses the same trouble input connector for the door tamper switch

(STS-200), the APS-6R, and the AVPS-24. If an APS-6R or AVPS-24 is installed and programmed, therefore, do not use the control panel in Fire/Burglary applications.

2. A Combination fire/burglary listing does not include supervisory service.

3. A security type circuit is designed to indicate an alarm on an open or short circuit, or a resistance change of 50% (plus or minus) from the end-of-line resistor value.

A tamper switch installed in the cabinet will also indicate a security alarm whenever the door is opened.

E.2 Installation

E.2.1 Installation Overview

Installing a combination Fire/Burglary application includes the following tasks:

• Installing a Tamper Switch.

• Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications.

• Connecting to an AM2020/AFP1010 Receiving Unit.

E.2.2 Installing a Tamper Switch

Wire the control panel with the STS-200 security tamper switch kit. To do so, follow these instructions:

1. Mount the STS-200 to the cabinet (Figure 148).

2. Run the wiring behind the CPU board (Figure 148).

3. Cut Jumper JP3.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


157


4. Plug connector from STS-200 into J11

STS-200

Installation

Cabinet

STS-200 wire run behind CPU board

CPU board

JP3

J11

Figure 148 Typical Installation of an STS-200 Tamper Switch

E.2.3 Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications

Figure 149 shows typical wiring for proprietary security alarm applications with a control module configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit. Note the following:

1. The control module is configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit and programmed in the Protected Premises Unit.

2. Supplementary use only applies to UL-listed systems.

158


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Programming

47K

End-of-Line

Resistor

(A2143-00)

47K

End-of-Line

Resistor

(A2143-00)


Refer to Device Compatibility Document 15378 for compatible Notification Appliance

Circuits.

AFP-200 Protected

Premises Unit

UL-listed, normally-open security switch

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

(-)

(+)

SLC (Channel A or B)

UL-listed, normally-closed security switch

UL-listed, normally-open security switch

Monitor

Module

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+

2

3

0

1

4

Monitor modules are programmed with type code

BURGLAR ALA (refer to

Section 3 “Programming”).

UL-listed, normally-closed security switch

Monitor

Module

47K

End-of-Line

Resistor

(A2143-00)

7

6

9

8

5

+

-

-

+ 2

3

0

1

4

To next device

+24 VDC UL-listed


Control

Module

(+) (-)

UL-listed 24 VDC

Power Supply

Figure 149 Wiring Diagram for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications

E.2.4 Connecting to an AM2020/AFP1010 Receiving Unit

For applications requiring transmission of burglary alarm information to a central receiving unit, do the following:

1. Connect the control panel to an AM2020 or AFP1010 provided with a NIB-96 network interface board. Burglar alarm zones are reported to the

AM2020/AFP1010 through the NIB-96 Network Interface Board (for installation instructions, refer to Appendix B).

2. Configure the AM2020/AFP1010 for Combination Fire/Security applications. For instructions, refer to the installation section of the AM2020/AFP1010 manual.

3. Program the AM2020/AFP1010 networked monitor points as SARM type code

(security alarm).

E.3 Programming

Program the control panel to select any number of Burglar Alarm type code devices

(refer to Section 3 “Programming”). To program a point used for security, follow these instructions:

1. Select the address of a monitor module used for security.

2. Set the monitor module type code to

BURGLAR ALA

.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


159


Operation

3. If needed, program additional sounders or output devices to activate when a security condition occurs.

Repeat steps 1–3 for each monitor module security device. You can also use the

Disable/Enable function to bypass security zones for burglar applications.

E.4 Operation

E.4.1 Overview

A security type circuit indicates an alarm on an open or short circuit, or a resistance change of ±50% from the end-of-line resistor value. Security signals latch and may have their own Control-by-Event. They do not cause resound of alarms or reactivation of silenced alarm CBE. Supervisory circuits may also report open circuit troubles, which operate like any other trouble. The security LED reports the same as a supervisory LED, but the LCD display will show the BURGLAR ALA type code.

E.4.2 Configuring the Keypad for a Security LED Indicator

The control panel is supplied with a unique security keypad slide-in label for combination fire/burglary applications. This security label is identical to the standard slide-in label, except the fourth label position shows “Security” in place of

“Supervisory”. On any burglar alarm, the Supervisory LED, as well as normally-open contacts on TB3 terminal 1 and TB3 terminal 2, will activate.

Note: A combination fire/burglary listing does not include supervisory service.

E.4.3 Control Panel Operation in a Security Condition

A security condition, activated by a monitor module programmed as BURGLAR ALA, causes the following to occur:

• The yellow Security LED lights.

• The panel LCD display indicates a burglar alarm or door tamper condition (Figure

150).

Security type code

Status banner “Active”


ACTIVE@BURGLAR ALA

MODULE ADDRESS 37

FLR@5@MAIN@BUILDING

11:13A@12/25/97@M37

Figure 150 Typical Panel LCD Display in a Security Condition

• The panel sounder pulses until acknowledged.

• Additional sounders or output devices programmed to activate on security condition.

When the system is reset a 30-second exit timer starts. During this time, the tamper switch and all burglar alarm type alarms are ignored. There is no entrance delay timer.

160


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Operation

Wire Requirements

Appendix F Wire Requirements

Each type of circuit within the fire alarm control system must use a specific type of wire to ensure proper operation. Also, the wire gauge of a particular circuit depends on the length of that circuit. Use the table below to determine the specific wiring requirements for each circuit.

Note: If running the SLC loop in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, you can reduce the risk of encountering problems by exclusively using electronic sounders

(such as the MA/SS-24I) instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances

(such as electromechanical bells or horns).

Circuit Type

SLC Loop

(power-limited)

Control Module

(power-limited)

NR45-24

Circuit Function

Connects to intelligent and addressable modules

Notification

Appliance Circuit

(NAC) and control modules

Remote secondary power source

Wire Requirements

Twisted-shielded pair, 12 to 18

AWG. 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loops

Untwisted, unshielded wire, in conduit or outside of conduit

Note:

Maximum total capacitance of

all

SLC wiring (both between conductors and from any conductor to earth) should

not

exceed 0.5 mircofarads.

Twisted-shielded pair with a characteristic impedance of

120 ohms,18 AWG minimum

EIA-485

(power limited)

EIA-232

(power-limited)

Monitor Modules

(power-limited)

Connects to

LCD-80 or to

Annunciator

Control System modules

Connects to PRN or P40 Remote

Printers and to a

DOS-based personal computer

Initiating Device

Circuit (IDC)

Twisted-shielded pair 18 AWG minimum

Distance

• 10,000 ft

(3048 m)

• 8,000 ft.

(2438.4m)

• 4,875 ft.

(1485.9 m)

• 3,225 ft.

(982.98 m)

• 1,000 ft.

(304.8 m)

Typical Wire Size

• 12 AWG

• 14 AWG

• 16 AWG

• 18 AWG

• 6,000 ft.

(1828.8 m)

(max)

• 16 AWG

• 50 ft.

(15.24 m)

(without modem)

• 18-12 AWG

• 16 AWG

12-18 AWG

Maximum loop wire resistance is

20 ohms

12-18 AWG

At alarm current level, no more than a 1.2 V drop at the end of the circuit

• To meet

20 ohms

• To meet

1.2 V drop

• 12-18 AWG

• 12-18 AWG more than 1.2 V drop across wire run from supply source to end of any branch

• To meet

1.2 V drop

• 12-18 AWG

12 AWG in conduit • 20 ft.

(6.096 m)

(max)

• 12 AWG

Table 59 Wiring Requirements

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


161

Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications

Overview

Appendix G Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications

G.1 Overview

The control panel includes a facility to give early warning of incipient or potential fire conditions (U.S. Patent Pending). This is a two-level (Alert and Action) Pre-Alarm function called AWACS™ (Advance Warning Addressable Combustion Sensing).

G.2 Pre-Alarm Applications

G.2.1 Pre-Alarm Alert Level

The control panel software, in addition to checking for alarm levels, checks for

Pre-Alarm thresholds for each ionization or photo smoke detector (not analog thermal detectors). If a Pre-Alarm level is reached that exceeds the programmed Alert or Action threshold, the appropriate condition appears on the panel display.

Alert Level Functions

The system performs the following functions when a detector reaches an Alert level:

• The Pre-Alarm LED flashes and the panel sounder pulses until acknowledged.

• An Alert message is sent to the history file and to installed peripheral devices, such as the LCD-80 and printer. The Alert message is also time-stamped (with the time that the Alert occurred) to provide historical data about the progress of a fire.

• Zone 99 activates. No other zones or relays activate.

• The Pre-Alarm indication automatically restores to normal if its sensitivity drops below Alert level. Zone 99 clears automatically when no Pre-Alarm conditions exist.

• A subsequent alarm, or an Action level condition for this detector will clear the

Alert indication.

Example of a Pre-Alarm Alert Condition

Figure 151 shows a sample panel display of a photoelectric detector that reaches the

Pre-Alarm Alert condition. In this example, zone 99 is programmed to Alert= 40% of

Alarm. An Alert will occur at measured smoke levels that exceed 0.40 x 2.0% per foot

(30.48 cm) obscuration (low) = 0.80% per foot (30.48 cm) obscuration.

PREALM

is the Pre-Alarm status banner.

Smoke (Photo)

is the type code of the detector.

2.0%

is the programmed alarm threshold (2.0% per foot (30.48 cm) obscuration is the low sensitivity setting).

PREALM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

ALERT: 0.80/2.00%@

12:00P@12/25/97@D13

Alert

indicates that the Alert level is reached.

0.80

is the reading of smoke relative to the sensitivity setting

Figure 151 Sample Screen in Alert Condition

0.80 is a real-time display, updated every few seconds, to show the current reading of this detector. In this example, the reading equals 40% of alarm, which puts the control panel into Alert condition.

162


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Pre-Alarm Programming


G.2.2 Action Level Pre-Alarm Function

Action Level Functions

If a detector reaches a level that exceeds the programmed Action threshold, an Action condition is indicated. The following functions are performed at Action level:

• The message is sent history file and to installed peripheral devices, such as the

LCD-80 and printer.

• The Pre-Alarm LED and panel sounder pulse until acknowledged.

• Zone 99 activates. No other zones or relays activate.

• The fifth zone programmed (not the first four) for this detector is activated. The fifth zone is the right-most entry on line three of the point programming screen.

This zone may be used to control functions of a detector or group of detectors on

Action level. The fifth zone activations will also allow ACS annunciation by a detector or group of detectors in Action Pre-Alarm state.

• The Pre-Alarm condition and the zone programmed latch until System Reset, even if the sensitivity drops below the Action or Alert level.

• A subsequent alarm condition for this detector clears the Action indication from the panel LCD display and Pre-Alarm LED, but will not reset the fifth zone (the fifth zone is also on the alarm list).

Example of a Pre-Alarm Action Condition

Figure 152 shows a sample panel display that appears if a detector is in Action level. In this example, zone 99 is programmed for Action = 60% of Alarm. Any measurement that exceeds 1.20% (0.60 X 2.00%) causes an Action Pre-Alarm condition.

PREALM

is the

Pre-Alarm status banner.

Smoke (Photo)

is the type code of the detector.

PREALM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

WEST@HALLWAY@FLR@5

ACTION: 1.20/2.00%

12:00P@12/25/97@D13

2.0%

is the programmed alarm threshold (2.0% per foot obscuration is the low sensitivity setting).

Action

indicates that the Action level is reached.

1.20

is the real-time approximate obscuration reading.

Figure 152 Sample Screen of an Action Level

G.3 Pre-Alarm Programming

G.3.1 Pre-Alarm Programming Screen

You can adjust the setting of the two Action and Alert levels (from 00% to 99%) to suit your application. From the Special Zone Change screen (Figure 74 on page 87), select

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


163



99=Prealm. Figure 153 shows a sample panel display of the Pre-Alarm screen with default Alert and Action Pre-Alarm levels:

Alert=70% of Alarm

means that every photo and ion detector will give an Alert indication when its sensitivity reaches 70% of its alarm level (default setting).

Status banner for

Pre-Alarm Zone 99

PRE-ALARM@ZONE@99

ALERT=70%@OF@ALARM

ACTION=00%@OF@ALARM

Action=00% of Alarm

– no

Pre-Alarm Action level selected in the system (default setting)

Figure 153 Sample Display of Pre-Alarm Screen with Default Values

When programming Pre-Alarm settings, note the following:

• The Alert default is 70%.

• The default value for Action is 00%. ACTION=00% means no Pre-Alarm, therefore the default is no Action level.

• Allowable settings for Alert and Action are 00% to 99%.

• The control panel software ensures that the Action level is higher than the Alert level (or the Action level is zero) and that both are below 100%.

G.3.2 Selecting Pre-Alarm Application Levels

Alert and Action Pre-Alarm levels are global settings, meaning they apply to all photoelectric or ionization detectors. You can, however, select different Action levels as detailed below. Figure 154 shows typical AWACS™ application threshold levels:

SMOKE OBSCURATION

% per foot

3%

ALERT

Warning at panel of possible fire

ACTION

Shut off power to equipment monitored by this detector

ALARM

Evacuate building and call fire department

2%

1%

164

TIME

Figure 154 Typical AWACS™ Application Threshold Levels

Selecting Different Action Levels

You can select different Pre-Alarm Action levels for each detector by selecting different alarm levels. For example, two detectors, D13 and D14, are connected to a control panel with a global Alert level set to 50% of alarm. Select different Pre-Alarm levels as follows:

• Detector D13 – Set to alarm at 2.00%, D13 so it will Pre-Alarm at 1.00% per foot

(30.48 cm) obscuration.

• Detector D14 – Set to alarm at 1.00%, so it will Pre-Alarm at 0.50% per foot

(30.48 cm) obscuration.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002




Latching and Non-Latching Pre-Alarm Levels

Some applications only require one level of Pre-Alarm, but the Pre-Alarm must be latching. To program a

latching

(non-restoring) Pre-Alarm, select ALERT=00% and select an Action level. To program a

non-latching

(self-restoring) Pre-Alarm, select

ACTION=00% and only select an Alert level.

Note: Only the Action level will provide ACS point annunciation.

G.3.3 Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm Function

Note: Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm mode only operates with FSP-751 photoelectric detectors. Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm does not function when selected for ionization detectors.

Description

The control panel software (PN 73609 or higher) includes a Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm selection, where the control panel automatically sets the optimal Pre-Alarm sensitivity for each photoelectric detector (FSP-751). When a detector senses smoke above the calculated optimal Pre-Alarm level, the control panel latches into an Action Level

Pre-Alarm (refer to Figure 155 on page 165). The software compensates for electrical noise transients, dust buildup, and other environmental factors.

Address of detector in Alarm

PRE-ALARM@SMOKE (PHOTO)

DETECTOR ADDRESS 03

ACTION:1.31/1.50%

03:02P 11/30/00 D03

Date and time of occurrence

Figure 155 Sample of Action Level Pre-Alarm

Applications include computer rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and telecommunication facilities where environments are clean and stable and early warning is essential. Self-Optimizing mode is not recommended for applications (such as cigarette smoking areas) where false smoke indications are present.

Programming

You can select Self-Optimizing for a photoelectric detector as follows:

1. From the Special Zone Change screen, select the 99=PREALM to display the

Pre-Alarm screen as shown in Figure 156.

Alert=00% of Alarm

Status banner for

Pre-Alarm Zone 99

PRE-ALARM@ZONE@99

ALERT=00%@OF@ALARM

ACTION=01%@OF@ALARM

Action=01% of Alarm

Figure 156 Sample Pre-Alarm Screen with Self-Optimizing Settings

2. Set Pre-Alarm settings: ALERT=00 and ACTION=01 as shown in Figure 156.

3. Program each detector for which Pre-Alarm is desired. Figure 157 shows a sample screen for a detector selected for Pre-Alarm. For detailed information on point

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


165

Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications programming, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

DETECTOR@ADDRESS@01

ZO3@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@

HIGH@@@@@@*P*@@@@D01


P indicates that the AWACS™ Pre-Alarm function is operational.

Figure 157 Point Programming Screen with Pre-Alarm Selected

The control panel will determine the optimal Pre-Alarm Action Level sensitivity for each detector selected, after approximately 10 minutes of data sampling.

G.3.4 Audible Warning Applications for AWACS™

A sounder base may be used with AWACS™ to give a local audible warning before general evacuation. This may be used to reduce the impact of false alarms from cooking, smoking, etc. in a multiple unit housing application. An individual in the apartment would receive advanced audible warning and could eliminate the source of the pending false alarm.

The control panel will activate the LEDs on the photoelectric or ionization detectors on a Pre-Alarm condition (Alert level or Action level). The detectors LEDs are used to drive the sounder base. When the LEDs on the detector light steadily for 10 seconds the sounder base will activate. If latching operation of the sounder base is desired, program the control panel for Action Pre-Alarm. If non-latching (self-restoring) operation is desired, program the system for Alert Pre-Alarm operation. If all sounder-bases are to activate on alarm, wire the power for these bases through two relay-module relay contacts that will reverse the polarity to the sounder bases on alarm.

166


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Overview

Special Zones

Appendix H Special Zones

H.1 Overview

This appendix provides descriptions and options for the following Special Zones:

Special Zones Used to define...

Z90

Z95, Z96, Z97

Z98

Presignal and PAS selections

Time Control selection, Holiday selections

NAC Code Types

Table 60 Special Zones

Note: Special Zones 91–94 are covered in Appendix D “Releasing Applications”

.

Special Zone 99 is covered in Appendix G “Pre-Alarm (AWACS™) Applications”.

H.2 Presignal and Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)

The control panel delays activation of outputs containing Z90 in their

Control-By-Event (CBE) equation for all alarm initiating devices that contain Z90 in their Control-By-Event equation. A subsequent alarm will abort the delay and execute

CBE equations. If using Z90, note the following:

• Do not include Z90 in the CBE equation for a releasing device.

• Z90 must be mapped to all participating outputs.

• Abort circuit activation by pressing Alarm Silence before the delay expires.

H.2.1 Presignal

You can set Presignal delay time between 60 and 180 seconds. Presignal delay does not apply to the following:

• the System Alarm relay;

• the 4XTM polarity reversal alarm output;

• the 4XTM municipal box output; and

• the RTM-8 output.

H.2.2 Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS)

Do not include Z90 in the CBE equation for any monitor module that connects to a device other than an automatic fire detector. NFPA 72 requires installation of a PAS

Inhibit switch. To do this, use a monitor module with type code “PAS Inhibit.”.

Selected outputs (set to PAS=Y) delay for 15 seconds. Pressing Acknowledge within the 15-second delay increases the delay to the full programmed value (60–

180 seconds). When an alarm comes from an initiating device with a CBE equation that includes Z90, the control panel delays the following outputs:

• the System Alarm relay;

• the 4XTM Polarity Reversal Alarm output; and

• the 4XTM Municipal Box output.

Note: PAS will not delay RTM-8 relay outputs.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


167

Special Zones

Time Control

H.3 Time Control

Note: All active Time Control outputs will turn off temporarily while resetting or programming the control panel.

All outputs with a CBE equation containing Z95 or Z96 activate within the times specified for the days of the week listed in Z95 or Z96. All smoke detectors with a CBE equation containing Z95 or Z96 switch to their lowest sensitivity (2.0%) within the times specified for the days of the week listed in Z95 or Z96.

Time Control is active for all days of the week listed in Z95 or Z96. Holidays listed in

Z97 are excluded unless you list Holidays (H) in the day-of-week selection. Enter the time in a 24-hour format with the OFF time later than the ON time. After changing programming using Time Control, always reset the control panel.

H.4 NAC Code Types

Control panel Notification Appliance Circuits with a CBE equation that includes Z98 are coded when activated by a fire alarm. These circuits are steady when activated exclusively by an initiating device with a Hazard Alert Type Code. If using these NACs for releasing or zone coding, do not include Z98 in the CBE equation. Select the code type on a system basis, through special zone Z98. Table 61 contains coding selections:

Code Type

March Time (default)

Two-Stage

Two-Stage Canada 3

Two-Stage Canada 5

Signal

120 PPM (Pulses Per Minute)

Alert signal – 20 PPM; General alarm signal: Temporal (see Note below).


Timer: 3 minutes


Timer: 5 minutes

10 sec. on, 5 sec. off, repeats

0.5 sec. on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 1.5 off, repeats

California

Temporal

Table 61 NAC Code Type Selections

Note: The control panel automatically sends an alert signal to any of the four

Notification Appliance Circuits mapped to Z00 and Z98, but not mapped to the alarm signal. After 5 minutes without an Acknowledge or Silence, the alert signal becomes

Temporal pattern.

Two-stage Canada functions like standard Two-Stage except only the Manual Evacuate will cause NAC to go to second stage. If acknowledge is pressed on first stage, timer will not time out. Subsequent alarm will restart timer.

168


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

General Description

Terminal Interface Protocol

Appendix I Terminal Interface Protocol

I.1 General Description

The control panel can communicate with a remote terminal or computer connected to the CPU EIA-232 port. (Refer to Section 2 “Installation” for installation information.)

Set up the EIA-232 port for interactive operation or for monitoring only. Interactive operation requires that all equipment be UL-listed under UL Standard for Safety UL864 and be installed and set up as directed under Local Terminal Mode (LocT) or Local

Monitor Mode (LocM). EDP listed equipment is allowed for ancillary system monitoring when the system is installed and set up as directed under Remote Monitor

Mode (RemM). You can also use EDP-listed equipment for system servicing or programming.

The EIA-232 ports on some terminals/computers, including the CRT-2, are not isolated from earth ground. These devices should be connected to the control panel through isolation modems, because direct connection can cause a ground fault.

I.2 Operating Modes

The control panel provides three operating modes for the EIA-232 port, Local Terminal

(LocT), Local Monitor (LocM), and Remote Monitor (RemM). You select the operating mode during control panel programming (system parameters). For more information, refer to Section 3 “Programming”.

The following subsections outline the functions, password requirements, and additional information for each operating mode.

I.2.1 Local Terminal Mode (LocT)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Local Terminal Mode (LocT) are:

Functions:

Passwords:

Read Status, Alter Status, and Control Functions.

User-defined password for Alter Status functions.

Requirements:

The terminal must be mounted in a UL-864 listed enclosure, a

Notifier Rack-51, Rack-67, or positioned to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


169


Operating Modes

Table 62 below summarizes the functions available with the Local Terminal mode:

Function

Read Status

Alter Status

Control

Functions

Lets you...

• Display the status of an individual point (detector, module, panel circuit, or zone)

• Display a list of all the points in alarm or trouble

• Display a list of all programmed points in the system

• Step through the history buffer event by event

• Display the entire history buffer

• Disable/Enable an individual point

• Change the sensitivity of a detector

• Clear the verification counter of all detectors

• Clear the entire history buffer

• Set the AWACS™ alert and action levels

• Acknowledge

• Alarm Silence

• System Reset

• Drill

Table 62 LocT Functions

I.2.2 Local Monitor Mode (LocM)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Local Monitor Mode (LocM) are:

Functions:

Read Status, Alter Status, and Control Functions.

Passwords:

User-defined password for Alter Status and Control functions.

Requirements:

Password security feature for Control Functions eliminates the need for mounting the CRT-2 in an enclosure.

Table 63 summarizes the functions available with the Local Monitor mode:

Function Lets you...

Read Status • Display the status of an individual point (detector, module, panel circuit, or zone)

• Display a list of all the points in alarm or trouble.




Alter Status*

Control

Functions*

• Disable/Enable an individual point

• Change the sensitivity of a detector

• Clear the verification counter of all detectors

• Clear the entire history buffer

• Set the AWACS™ alert and action levels

• Acknowledge

• Alarm Silence

• System Reset

• Drill

*Requires the user defined password for access.

Table 63 LocM Functions

I.2.3 Remote Terminal Mode (RemT)

Functions, passwords, and special requirements of Remote Terminal Mode (RemT) are:

Functions:

Read Status only. See Table 64.

170


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Using the CRT-2 for Read Status


Passwords:

None

Requirements:

Use with UL EDP-listed terminals, including personal computers with Veri•Fire™ Upload/Download software or terminal emulation software. Intended for terminals connected through modems, including Notifier TPI modems connected through a public switched telephone network.

Table 64 summarizes the functions available with the RemT mode:

Functions

Read Status

Lets you...

• Display the status of an individual point (detector, module, panel circuit, or zone)

• Display a list of all the points in Alarm or trouble




N/A

N/A

Alter Status

Control

Functions

Table 64 RemT Functions

I.3 Using the CRT-2 for Read Status

I.3.1 Overview

This section shows how to perform the Read Status functions from a CRT-2.

Function

Read Point

Lets you...

Read the status of any point in the system (detectors, modules, bell circuits, software zones, and system parameters).

Display a list of all devices in the system that are in Alarm or trouble.

Alm/Tbl

Status

Read All

Points

History Step

History-All

Display a list of all points programmed in the system. This list will display the status of all addressable detectors, modules, NACs, system parameters and software zones.

Step through the history buffer one event at a time.

Send the entire history buffer to the CRT, from the most recent event to the oldest event.

Table 65 Read Status Functions

I.3.2 Accessing Read Status Options

Access the Read Status function from the CRT-2 by following these steps.

1. Turn on the CRT-2, which is connected to the control panel.

2. Press the Read Status function key – F1. The control panel displays the Read Status menu options:

Press

B

Read Point=1 Alm/Tbl Status=2 Read All Points=3 History Step=4/All=5

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


171


Using the CRT-2 for Read Status

From the Read Status menu, you can select options 1-5.

I.3.3 Read Point

From the Read Status menu, select Read Point, option

1

. The CRT-2 displays the following:

Press

1W

Address or number

Enter D(Det.) / M(Mod.) / B(Bell) / Z(Zone),AA or S(System params.)

Press

%

to scroll forward through a list of devices.

Press

^

to scroll back through a list of devices.

Enter the following:

1. Enter the first letter of the device.

•

D

etector

•

M

odule

•

B

ell circuit

•

Z

one or

•

S

ystem Parameter.

2. Enter the address or number of the device.

3. Press <Enter>.

Example

Read the point for detector at address 29:

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDRESS 29 Z91 Z Z Z Z 0.00/2.00% *P* D29

Press

d29

W

G

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDRESS 30 Z91 Z Z Z Z 0.00/1.50% *P* D30

Press

2W

I.3.4 Display Devices in Alarm or Trouble

From the Read Status menu, select Alm/Tbl status, option

2

:

TROUBL HEAT(ANALOG) DETECTOR ADDRESS 06 Z91 INVALID REPLY 08:10A 08/20/97 D06

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO)DETECTOR ADDRESS 29 Z12 DEVICE DISABLED 08:10A 08/20/97 D29

TROUBL CONTROL MODULE ADDRESS 21 Z00 OPEN CIRCUIT 08:10A 08/20/97 M21

Press

3W

I.3.5 Display the Status of all Programmed Points

From the Read Status menu, select Read All Points, option

3

. The CRT-2 displays a list of the status of all addressable detectors, modules, bell circuits, system parameters and software zones:

NORMAL HEAT(ANALOG) DETECTOR ADDRESS 32 Z32 Z Z Z Z 08:10A 08/20/97 D06

NORMAL MONITOR MODULE ADDRESS 02 Z01 Z Z Z Z 08:10A 08/20/97 M02

OFF BELL CIRCUIT PANEL CIRCUIT NO.3 Z00 Z Z Z Z 08:10A 08/20/97 M02

172


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status

Press

4W


I.3.6 View the History Buffer

From the Read Status menu, select History-Step, option

4

. This option lets you step through the history buffer one event at a time:

The first line that appears displays the most recent event in the history buffer.

SYSTEM RESET 3:17A Fri 08/20/97

Press

%

to scroll forward through the history buffer.

Press

^

to scroll back through the history buffer.

Step through the history buffer one event at a time by pressing the Next (F5) or Prior

(F6) function keys.

I.3.7 Send the History Buffer to the CRT-2

From the Read Status menu, select History-All, option

5

. This option sends the entire history buffer to the CRT-2, from most recent event to oldest event:

Press

5W

Most recent event

****************************** EVENT HISTORY START***************************

ALARM: HEAT(ANALOG) DETECTOR ADDRESS 55 ZONE 55 3:10A 04/20/97 D55

ALARM: SMOKE(PHOTO) DETECTOR ADDRESS 29 ZONE 01 3:15A 04/20/97 D29

ACKNOWLEDGE 3:16A Fri 04/20/97

SYSTEM RESET 3:17A Fri 04/20/97

******************************* EVENT HISTORY END ***************************

I.4 Using the CRT-2 for Alter Status

I.4.1 Overview

This section shows how to do Alter Status functions, Table 66, from a CRT-2.

Function

Disable

Sensitivity

Clear Verification

Clear History

Set Action/Alert

Lets you...

Enable or disable detectors, modules, or NACs.

Change the sensitivity of any addressable detector in the system.

Clear the verification counter for all the addressable detectors in the system.

Clear the contents of the history buffer.

Set the Pre-Alarm for the Alert or Action level.

Table 66 Alter Status Functions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


173



I.4.2 Accessing Alter Status Options

Access the Alter Status function from the CRT-2 by following these steps.

1. Turn on the CRT-2 connected to the control panel.

2. Press the Alter Status function key. The control panel displays the Alter Status menu options:

Press

C

Enter Status Change Password or Escape to Abort

3. Enter the Status Change Password. The factory default Status Change Password is

11111. The password does not display on the CRT-2. Five asterisks will appear in place of the password:

Press

11111

W

Press

1

*****

The Alter Status Options menu appears:

1=Disable 2=Sensitivity 3=Clear Verification 4=Clear History 5=Set Action/Alert

From the Alter Status Options menu, you can select options 1-5.

I.4.3 Enable or Disable Detectors, Modules, or Bell Circuits

From the Alter Status menu, select Disable, option

1

. Disable lets you enable or disable detectors, modules, or bell Circuits:

Address or number

Disable/Enable D(Det.) / M(Mod.) / B(Bell ckt.), AA

Enter the following:

1. Enter the first letter to read one of the following:

•

D

etector

•

M

odule

•

B

ell Circuit (NAC)

2. Enter the address or number of the device.

3. Press <Enter> and a display similar to the following will appear.

174


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Example

Disable the NAC at address 1:

Press

b01

W

B01


4. Press <E> to Enable or press <D> to Disable; then press <Enter>:

Press

d or e

W

B01 Now Enabled, Enter E(Enable) / D(Disable) or Esc. to Abort

I.4.4 Change Detector Sensitivity Levels

This option lets you change the Alarm and Pre-Alarm levels of any addressable detector in the system. To do so, follow these steps.

5. From the Alter Status menu, select Sensitivity, option

2

:

Press

2W

Det. Sensitivity Enter point: AA, E

Press

57

W

6. Enter the address of the detector you wish to change. For example, detector 57:

D57 now Low sens. Enter H, M, or L to change, Esc. to Abort

Press

3W

I.4.5 Clear the Verification Counter

Clear Verification, option

3

, lets you clear the verification counter for all the addressable detectors in the system:

Press Enter to Clear Verification Counts or Esc. to Abort

Press

4W

I.4.6 Clear the Entire History Buffer

Clear History, option

4

, lets you clear the entire history buffer:

Press Enter to Clear History or Esc. to Abort

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


175



I.4.7 Set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action Level

Set Action/Alert, option

5

, lets you set the Pre-Alarm for Alert or Action. For example, set Alert level=50% and the Action level=70% as follows:

Press

5W

Set % of Alarm: Alert(T) and Action(N) Format: TxxNxx then Enter

Press

t50 n70

W

T50N70

I.4.8 CRT-2 Configuration

The CRT-2 must be set up to communicate with the control panel using the proper protocol. To enter the setup menu on the CRT-2, hold down the CTRL button while pressing the SCROLL LOCK key. There are thirteen groups of parameters that must be set. Each of these thirteen groups is reached by pressing the corresponding function key

(F1 - F13). Use the arrow key to move through each setup group and use the space bar to view the options for each parameter.

176


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Overview

Expansion Power Supplies

Appendix J Expansion Power Supplies

J.1 Overview

Expansion power supplies provide additional power for notification appliances connected to NAC 3 and NAC 4 on the control panel. You can install one of the following expansion power supplies:

Expansion Power

Supply

Description

Audio/Visual Power

Supply

(AVPS-24/AVPS-24E)

Auxiliary Power

Supply (APS-6R)

A 24 VDC unfiltered, unregulated power supply that supplies a maximum of 3.0 A to the notification appliances connected to NACs 3 and 4 combined. The maximum current from any one circuit, however, is limited to 2.5 A.

An APS-6R (120 VAC or 240 VAC input) supplies power to NACs and provides two filtered, regulated, non-resettable 24 VDC outputs (3 A each, 6 A total, 4 A continuous).

Table 67 Expansion Power Supplies

An expansion power supply mounts in the battery compartment of the cabinet. Batteries must be relocated to the BB-17 Battery Box. This appendix contains instructions for mounting and wiring an AVPS-24 and APS-6R as well as instructions for programming the control panel.

WARNING: Because the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E supplies special purpose power that is unfiltered & unregulated, only compatible notification appliances listed in the

Device Compatibility Document can be connected to NACs 3 and 4.

J.1.1 AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply

The AVPS-24 supplies power (unfiltered, unregulated, 3.0 A maximum) to Notification

Appliance Circuits (NACs) and occupies one position on the CHS-4 chassis. A trouble cable is provided for connection to the control panel. The AVPS-24 mounts in the bottom of the AFP-200 cabinet. AC power required for the AVPS-24 is 120 VAC,

50/60 Hz, 1.0 A and AC power required for the AVPS-24E is 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

0.5 A. Figure 158 shows an AVPS-24 and the provided Power Cable

Power Cable (71093)

Figure 158 AVPS-24 Power Supply

J.1.2 APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply

The APS-6R is a 150W cabinet-mounted power supply, designed to power devices that require filtered, regulated, non-resettable power, such as NACs and Control Modules.

The APS-6R provides two 24 VDC (filtered) output circuits (3 A each, 6 A total, 4 A

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


177


Overview

continuous). The APS-6R mounts in the bottom of the AFP-200 cabinet. Figure 159 shows an APS-6R and the supplied Power Cable:

Power Cable (71093)

Figure 159 APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply

Electrical Specifications

AC primary input power (TB1) Wire Size: #14 AWG with 600 VAC insulation

120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 A

240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.2 A

24 VDC Secondary input power (lead-acid batteries only)

TB3-1 (+) 25 mA DC standby current

TB3-2 (–) operating)

16 mA DC standby current (with AC fail delay

24 VDC output power (TB2)

Total 6 A (4 A continuous)

Circuit 1 (TB2-1, TB2-2; or J1) 3 A @24 VDC power-limited (+10, –15%)

Circuit 2 (TB2-3, TB2-4; or J2) 3 A @24 VDC power-limited (+10, –15%)

Fuses

F1 (AC supervision)

F2 (battery supervision)

250 VAC, 4A, 3 AG, slow blow

32 VAC, 10 A, 3 AG, slow blow

Trouble supervision bus

J3 output

J4 input

Form A contact (open collector)

Form A contact (open collector)

Note: J3 and J4 can be interchanged.

Loss of AC Indication

Immediate indication (default)

8 hour delay (cut JP2)

16 hour delay (cut JP2 and JP3)

Size of APS-6R in enclosure

6.09 in. x 4.23 in. x 2.92 in.

178


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Programming


J.2 Programming

Note: A control panel programmed for an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E/APS-6R cannot be used in a combination Fire/Burglary application, because the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E/APS-6R trouble input is the same input used to monitor the door tamper switch (STS-200).

The control panel must be programmed to supervise the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or

APS-6R. To program supervision for an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R, follow these steps:

1. Enter programming mode (refer to Section 3 “Programming”).

2. From the Program Change screen, select 7=SYSTEM (General System Functions) to display the System Function screen. Figure 82 shows a typical System Function screen.



ANNUN=ACS(1+2)@@LocT

BLINK=Y@ST=4@AVPS=Y

Set to “Y” to enable supervision for the

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E or APS-6R.

Figure 160 System Function Screen

3. Enter a “Y” after “AVPS=” as shown in Figure 82.

4. Press Enter to save changes; then, exit programming mode.

J.3 Supply Calculations

J.3.1 AVPS-24/AVPS-24E Calculations

Supply calculations for systems with an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E are as follows.

• Add 1.0 A for the AVPS-24 and 0.5 A for the AVPS-24E to the AC branch circuit current in Table 44 and Table 45.

• Do not include the load current on NAC circuits 3 and 4 in the 5.0 A limitation in

Table 47 and notes.

System alarm current limitations with an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E installed follow:

• TB1, terminals 1 and 2 = 1.5 A



• TB1, terminals 3 and 4 combined with terminals 5 and 6 = 0.5 A

• All circuits on TB1 combined with TB2 terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4 = 5.0 A

• TB2, terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 combined (NACs 3 and 4) = 3.0 A

• TB2, any one circuit = 2.5 A

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


179


Installation

J.3.2 APS-6R Calculations

Supply calculations for systems with an APS-6R follow:

• Add 2.5 A for the APS-6R and 1.2 A for the APS-6R to the AC branch circuit current in Table 44 and Table 45.

• Do not include the load current on NAC 3 and 4 in the 5.0 A limitation in Table 47 and notes.

System alarm current limitations with an APS-6R installed follow:

• TB2, terminal 1 and 2 or J1 = 3.0 A

• TB2, terminal 3 and 4 or J2 = 3.0 A

• TB2, terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 combined = 6.0 A

J.4 Installation

This section contains instructions for installing an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E and an

APS-6R.

J.4.1 Installing the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

Mounting the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

To mount the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E, follow these steps:

1. Place the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E into the cabinet as shown in Figure 161.

2. Insert mounting screws into cabinet; then tighten the screws until the

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E is securely fastened to the cabinet.

180

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

Mounting screws

Figure 161 Mounting the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

Wiring the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

Wire the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E to the control panel according to the steps in Table 68 and the drawing in Figure 162.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Installation


!

.

WARNING: Use extreme caution when working with the AVPS-24 or APS-6R—high voltage and AC line-connected circuits are present in the AVPS-24 or APS-6R.

Turn off and remove all power sources. To reduce the risk of electric shock—make sure to properly ground the AVPS-4R or APS-6R. Before connecting AC and DC power, install the APS-6R cover.

Step

1

Action

Connect AC power as follows

Wire and Color from

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

TB1 terminal 6 Earth Ground

(green)

AC Hot (black)

AC Neutral (white)

TB1 terminal 5

TB1 terminal 4

to Control Panel

TB7 terminal 3

TB7 terminal 1

TB7 terminal 2

2

3

4

Connect the battery as follows:

Wire and Color from

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

Battery – (black)

Battery + (red)

TB1 terminal 3

TB1 terminal 2

to Control Panel

connector J3 (–) connector J3 (+)

Connect the Power Harness to control panel NACs 3 and 4 as follows:

• Cut jumpers JP6 and JP 7 on the CPU board (Figure 162).

Plug the Power Harness (PN 71093) into plug J10 on the CPU board (Figure 162) as follows:

• Connect J10 (–) to TB2 terminal 2 on the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E.

• Connect J10 (+) to TB2 terminal 1 on the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E.

Connect the Supervisory cable to the control panel as follows:

• Cut jumper JP3 on the CPU board (Figure 162)

• Plug the gray Supervisory Cable (PN 71033) into J11 with the wires exiting the connector on top. Plug J11 is located in the bottom right center of the control panel circuit board.

• Plug the other end of the Supervisory Cable into P1 on the AVPS-24 with the wires exiting from the bottom (Figure 162).

Table 68 AVPS-24/AVPS-24E Wiring Instructions

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


181


Installation

Figure 162 shows wiring connections between the AVPS-24/AVPS-24E and the control panel:

JP7

JP6

Power Cable

PN 71093

J10

TB

7

J3

JP3

AVPS-24/AVPS-24E

BB-17 Battery Box

Battery Battery

Figure 162 Wiring the AVPS-24 to the Control Panel

Supervisory

Cable

PN 71033

TB1

TB2

182


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Installation


J.4.2 Installing the APS-6R

Mounting the APS-6R

To mount the APS-6R, follow these steps:

1. Place the APS-6R into the cabinet as shown in Figure 163.

2. Insert mounting screws into cabinet; then tighten the screws until the APS-6R is securely fastened to the cabinet.

APS-6R

!

Mounting

Figure 163 Mounting the APS-6R

Wiring the APS-6R

Wire the APS-6R to the control panel according to the steps in Table 69 and the drawing in Figure 164.

WARNING: Use extreme caution when working with the AVPS-24 or APS-6R—high voltage and AC line-connected circuits are present in the AVPS-24 or APS-6R.

Turn off and remove all power sources. To reduce the risk of electric shock—make sure to properly ground the AVPS-4R or APS-6R. Before connecting AC and DC power, install the APS-6R cover.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


183


Installation

.

Step

1

2

Action

Connect AC power:

Wire and Color

Earth Ground (green)

AC Hot (black)

AC Neutral (white)

Connect the battery:

Wire and Color

Battery – (black)

Battery + (red)

3

4

from APS-6R...

TB1 terminal 3

TB1 terminal 1

TB1 terminal 2

from APS-6R...

TB3 terminal 2

TB3 terminal 1

to Control Panel...

TB7 terminal 3

TB7 terminal 1

TB7 terminal 2

to Control Panel...

connector J3 (–) connector J3 (+)

Connect the Power Harness to control panel NACs 3 and 4 as follows:

• Cut jumpers JP6 and JP7 on the CPU board (Figure 164).

Plug the Power Harness (PN 71093) into plug J10 on the CPU board (Figure 164) as follows:

• Connect J10 (–) to TB2 terminal 2 on the APS-6R.

• Connect J10 (+) to TB2 terminal 1 on the APS-6R.

Connect the Supervisory cable to the control panel as follows:

• Cut jumper JP3 on the CPU board (Figure 164)

• Plug the gray Supervisory Cable (PN 71033) into J11 on the CPU board (Figure

164) with the wires exiting the connector on top.

• Plug the other end of the Supervisory Cable into J3 on the APS-6R (Figure 164).

Table 69 APS-6R Wiring Instructions

184


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Installation


Figure 162 shows wiring connections between the APS-6R and the control panel:

Power Cable

PN 71093

JP7

JP6

J10

APS-6R

TB7

JP3

TB1

TB3

TB2

Supervisory Cable

PN 71033

BB-17 Battery Box Battery

Battery

Figure 164 Wiring the APS-6R to the Control Panel

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


185

UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

Overview

Appendix K UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

K.1 Overview

This appendix provides guidelines for power-limited and nonpower-limited UL wiring requirements. Figure 165 shows typical wiring for a circuit with power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring that meets UL requirements, which are as follows:

• Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet

• All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) away from any nonpower-limited circuit wiring.

• Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring cannot enter and exit the cabinet through the same knockout or conduits. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring as shown in Figure 165.

K.2 Typical Circuit with Nonpower-limited and Power-limited Wiring

Note: For complete information on wiring an RTM-8 module, refer to “Installing an

RTM-8 Module” on page 63.

Figure 165 shows the RTM-8 module installed in the AFP-200 cabinet. Observe the following:

• Power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring maintain a minimum distance of

0.25 inch (6.35 mm) wire-to-wire.

• A 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) gap exists between relay 4 and relay 5. If using this module to drive both power-limited and nonpower-limited circuits, use relays 1-4 to drive power-limited circuits and relays 5-8 to drive nonpower-limited circuits.

Using relays 5-8 for nonpower-limited circuits allows grouping them with the transmitter output nonpower-limited wiring.

• If using all relays as power-limited circuits, the 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) gap between relay 8 and the nonpower-limited transmitter output terminal meets UL power-limited wiring requirements.

Power-limited circuits Power-limited circuits

186

0.75-inch gap (19.05 mm) between power-limited and nonpower-limited circuits

Nonpower-limited circuits

0.25-inch (6.35 mm) gap

Nonpower-limited transmitter output terminal

AC Power

Figure 165 Typical Wiring Diagram for UL Power-limited Requirements

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


Typical Circuit with Nonpower-limited and Power-limited Wiring

U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s Register

Appendix L U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s Register

USCG.

Table 70 contains a list of equipment suitable for use in marine and shipyard applications as compatible with the AFP-200.

Notifier Equipment

29085 Ferrite Bead for I/O Lines

29146 Ferrite Bead for AC input

ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module

ABM-32A Annunciator Blank Module

ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module

ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module

ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module (Relay)

AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module

AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module

AFM-16A Annunciator Fixed Module

AFM-16AT Annunciator Fixed Module

AFM-32A Annunciator Fixed Module

AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply

B224BI Intelligent isolator base

B224RB Intelligent Relay base

B401B Detector Base

B402B Four-Wire Detector Base

B501 Flangeless Base for Intelligent Detectors

B501BH Sounder base with B501 base

B501BH Sounder Base

B501BHT Same as B501BH, but includes

Temporal sounder

B710LP Standard US Low-Profile base

BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station

BX-501 Base for all Intelligent

Detectors/Sensors

CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications

CMX-1 Addressable Control Module


CP-651 Ionization Detector

CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector


CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard

DHX-501 Duct Housing

DHX-502 Duct Housing

Drip Shield Kit Alternate to CAB-AM

FCM-1 Addressable Control Module

FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor

FMM-1 Addressable Monitor Module

FMM-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module

FRM-1 Addressable Relay Module

FSI-751 Addressable Low Profile Ion Detector

FSP-751 Addressable Low Profile Photoelectric

Detector

FSP-751T Addressable Low Profile

Photoelectric with Fixed thermal Detector

FST-751R Addressable Low Profile Heat with

Rate of Rise Sensor

FZM-1 Addressable Zone Monitor Module

HPX-751 Addressable Hostile-environment smoke detector

ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module

LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module

LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module

LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module

LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module

LP-610 Smoke Detector Base

MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module

MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module


N-ARA-10 Agent Release Pull Station

NBG-12 Dull Action Manual Pull Station with

Hex lock

NBG-12L Dull Action Manual Pull Station with key lock

NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station

NBG-12S Single Action Manual Pull Station with pigtail connections and hex lock

NBG-12SP Same as NBG-12L with English and Spanish Labeling

N-ELR Assortment Pack with Mounting Plate


NR45-24 Notifier Remote Battery Charger

PRN-4 80-Column Printer

R-120 120 ohm End-of-Line Resistor

R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor

R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor



RTM-8 Relay Module

SB-10 Surface Backbox

SD-651 Photoelectric Detector

SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector


SMB-500 Surface Mount Box

WP-10 Weatherproof Backbox

System Sensor

1400 Smoke Detector

1451 Smoke Detector

2400TH Smoke Detector with Thermal

2451 Smoke Detector

A2143-00 End-of-Line Resistor Assembly

A77-716B End-of-Line Power Supervision

Relay

H24 (W) 24VDC Horn Red (White)

H24K 24VDC Horn weather proof Red only

MA-24 Electronic Sounder, 24 VDC

MA-24D Sounder, 24 VDC

MASS24110ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 110

CD

MASS241575ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe

15/75 CD

MASS2415ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 15

CD

MASS2475ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 15/75

CD

MASS24LO 24V Red Sounder/Strobe

MASS24LOC 24V Sounder/Strobe Ceiling

P24110 w) 24VDC 110cd Horn / Strobe Red

(White)

P24110K 24VDC 110cd Horn / Strobe weather proof Red only

P2415 (W) 24VDC 15cd Horn / Strobe Red

(White)

P241575 (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe

Red (White)

P241575AG 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe agent Red only

P241575EV 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe evacuation Red only

P241575K 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe weather proof Red only

P241575P (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe no lettering Red (White)


(White)


(White)


PS24LO 24V Red Sounder Strobe

RA-400/RA400Z Remote LED Assembly

S24110 w) 24VDC 110cd Strobe Red (White)

S24110K 24VDC 110cd Strobe weather proof

Red only

S2415 (W) 24VDC 15cd Strobe Red (White)

S241575 (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe Red

(White)

S241575AG 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe agent

Red only

S241575EV 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe evacuation Red only

S241575K 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe weather proof Red only

S241575P (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe no lettering Red (White)




Red only

SS-24 Strobe 24 VDC

SS24110ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 110 CD

SS241575ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 15/75

CD

SS2415ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Strobe 15 CD

SS2475ADA 24 VDC Sounder/Sounder 75 CD

SS24LO 24 V Red Sounder Strobe

SS24LOC 24V Sounder/Strobe Ceiling

WBB Weatherproof Backbox

Hochiki

HSC-200 Detector Base

HSC-4R Four-Wire Detector Base

SIH-24F Smoke Detector

SLK-24F Smoke Detector

Wheelock

7002T-24 Horn with Strobe, 24 VDC

MB-G10-24-R Bell 10" Gong 24 VDC Red

MB-G6-24-R Bell 6" Gong 24 VDC Red

Fenwal

27121-0 140 Degree F. Thermal Detector



Table 70 Equipment Suitable for Marine Applications: US Coast Guard

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


187

U.S. Coast Guard & Lloyd’s Register

Typical Circuit with Nonpower-limited and Power-limited Wiring

Table 71 contains a list of equipment listed with Lloyd’s Register as compatible with the AFP-200.

Notifier Equipment

29085 Ferrite Bead for I/O Lines

29146 Ferrite Bead for AC input

ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module

ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank

ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module

ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module

ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel

AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module

AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module

AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply

B224BI Intelligent isolator base

B224RB Intelligent Relay base

B501 Flangeless Base

B501BH Sounder base with B501 base

B501BHT Same as B501BH, but includes

Temporal sounder

B710LP Standard US Low-Profile base

BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station

BP-3 Battery Dress Panel

CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications





FCM-1 Addressable Control Module

FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor

FMM-1 Addressable Monitor Module

FMM-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module

FRM-1 Addressable Relay Module

FSI-751 Addressable Low Profile Ion Detector

FSP-751 Addressable Low Profile Photoelectric

Detector

FSP-751T Addressable Low Profile

Photoelectric with Fixed thermal Detector

FST-751R Addressable Low Profile Heat with

Rate of Rise Sensor

FZM-1 Addressable Zone Monitor Module

HPX-751 Addressable Hostile-environment smoke detector

ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module

LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module



NBG-12 Dull Action Manual Pull Station with

Hex lock

NBG-12L Dull Action Manual Pull Station with key lock

NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station

NBG-12S Single Action Manual Pull Station with pigtail connections and hex lock

NBG-12SP Same as NBG-12L with English and Spanish Labeling


PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour

R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor

R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor




SB-10 Surface Backbox



SMB-500 Surface Mount Box

WP-10 Weatherproof Backbox

System Sensor

H24 (W) 24VDC Horn Red (White)

H24K 24VDC Horn weather proof Red only

MA/SS-24D Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24

VDC

P24110 w) 24VDC 110cd Horn / Strobe Red

(White)



(White)

P241575 (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe

Red (White)

P241575AG 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe agent Red only

P241575EV 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe evacuation Red only

P241575K 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe weather proof Red only

P241575P (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Horn / Strobe no lettering Red (White)


(White)


(White)


S24110 w) 24VDC 110cd Strobe Red (White)


Red only


S241575 (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe Red

(White)

S241575AG 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe agent

Red only

S241575EV 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe evacuation Red only

S241575K 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe weather proof Red only

S241575P (W) 24VDC 15 / 75cd Strobe no lettering Red (White)




Red only

WBB Weatherproof Backbox

Table 71 Equipment Suitable for Marine Applications: Lloyd’s Register

188


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Purpose

CBE Programming

Appendix M CBE Programming

M.1 Purpose

Control-By-Event (CBE) is a programming method that lets you provide a variety of response based on various combinations of initiating events. CBE controls the interaction among the alarm initiating devices, software zones, and alarm notification appliances. Each addressable, intelligent detector monitor module, and control module contains an area for 1–5 CBE entries. For example, Figure 166 shows a sample programming screen that shows CBE entries for a module.

CBE list

PROGRM@CONTROL

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z00@Z02@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@S*M08

Figure 166 Sample Programming Screen with CBE Entries

M.2 Software Zones

A software zone is a software group in control panel memory. The control panel provides 99 software zones that you can use for CBE programming, and they are:

• Zone 00 (general alarm zone)

• Software zones (01-89)

• Special function zones (90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99)

• Releasing zones (91–94)

Each input (detector and monitor) can be mapped to software zones 01-89, releasing zones 91-94, and time control zones (96 and 97). Each output (control module) can be mapped to all software zones 00-99.

M.3 How to Program CBE

You program CBE by programming input and output devices with a list of zones. You do this by editing devices in autoprogram (“How to Autoprogram the Control Panel

(1=auto)” on page 73) or in point programming (“How to Edit or Delete a Point

(2=point)” on page 78). The Autoprogram option creates a default CBE list, depending on the type of device. This section provides three examples of CBE programming.

M.3.1 CBE Example 1

Program a photoelectric detector (D01), to activate a control module (M08), when detector D01 goes into alarm. Edit the detector and module so they both list zone Z05,

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


189

CBE Programming

How to Program CBE

which puts Z05 into the CBE of D01 and M08. When detector D01 goes into alarm, control module M08—and all devices and zones mapped to M08—also activate.

PROGRM@SMOKE(PHOTO)

DETECTOR@ADDRESS@01

ZO3@Z05@Z@@@Z@@@Z@@

2.0%@@@@@@*P*@@@@D01

PROGRM@CONTROL

MODULE@ADDRESS@08

Z00@Z05@Z@@Z@@Z

@@@@@@@@@@@@@S*M08

Detector

Zone Z05

Both devices contain zone Z05 in its CBE list

Software

Zone Z05

Module

Zone Z05

Figure 167 CBE Example 1

M.3.2 CBE Example 2

Program a Bell Circuit (B04) to activate a march time code.

1. Program Z98 (Code Type) to “March Time.” For instructions, refer to Section 3

“Programming”.

2. Program the Bell Circuit B04 to list Z98 in its CBE list.

3. When the Bell Circuit B04 activates, all devices connected to B04 will pulse with the March Time code.

PRG@SOFTWARE@ZONE

CODE@TYPE:

MARCH@TIME

Z98

Z98 programmed for

March Time

PROGRM BELL CIRCUIT

PANEL CIRCUIT NO. 4

Z00@Z98@Z@@Z@@Z

SW B04

B04 programmed with

Z98 in its CBE list

Figure 168 CBE Example 2

190


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Overview

External Battery Charger

Appendix N External Battery Charger

N.1 Overview

The CHG-120 is capable of charging 25 AH to 120 AH batteries. You must install an external battery charger if the power supply must deliver more than 3.0 A of current when no fire alarm signal is present. To use the CHG-120 with the AFP-200, you must cut jumper JP2 on the main CPU board (see Figure 3 on page 17).

Refer to the CHG-120 Instruction Manual (PN 50641) for detailed information on

CHG-120 specifications, connections, operation, and configuration.

N.2 Installation Requirements

Options for mounting batteries are as follows:

1. Cut jumper JP2 on the main circuit board.

2. Mount the CHG-120 in an external battery box

3. Locate the CHG-120 within 20 feet (6.096 m) of the control panel.

The CHG-120 battery charger is designed to charge lead-acid batteries that provide emergency standby power for a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Two 12-volt batteries are always used in series to supply 24 VDC nominal.

N.3 Mounting the CHG-120

N.3.1 Mounting the Charger into a CAB-X3 Series Cabinet

You can mount a charger into the bottom row of a CAB-X3 Series Cabinet, as long as the charger is within 20 feet (6.096 m) of the load. Typically, a charger mounts into the lower right corner of the CAB-X3—beside the power supply (Figure 169, position 2).

If using an additional CAB-X3, you can mount the charger in the lower left corner

(Figure 169, position 2).

Figure 169 shows the two mounting positions of a charger into a CAB-X3.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


191


Mounting the CHG-120

Mounting hooks

Position 1:

Lower right corner.

Position 2:

Lower left corner.

Figure 169 Mounting a Charger into a CAB-X3 (CAB-C3 shown)

To mount a charger into a CAB-X3 Series Cabinet, follow these instructions:

1. Place the charger chassis mounting slots in line with the mounting holes in the cabinet. If mounting in position 2, place the charger chassis onto the mounting hooks in the cabinet.

2. Insert the self-tapping screws through the charger chassis mounting slots and into the mounting holes in the cabinet.

Self-tapping screw

Chassis mounting slot

3. Tighten the self-tapping screws.

N.3.2 Mounting the Charger into a Battery Box

You can also mount a charger into a BB-55 or NFS-LBB battery box, as long as the box is within 20 feet (6.096 m) of the load. Note that a charger takes up half the space of the

192


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Mounting the CHG-120

External Battery Charger battery box. This means there is only room left for two 25 AH batteries in the BB-55 or NFS-LBB.

Figure 170 shows the mounting position.

Optional bracket for mounting an optional

AM-1 or VM-1

Self-tapping screws

Figure 170 Mounting a Charger into a BB-55 or NFS-LBB

To mount a charger into the battery box, follow these instructions:

1. Place the charger chassis mounting slots in line with the mounting holes in the BB-55 or

NFS-LBB.

2. Insert the self-tapping screws through the charger chassis mounting slots and into the mounting holes in the battery box.

Self-tapping screw

Chassis mounting slot

3. Tighten the self-tapping screws.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


193


Connecting the CHG-120

N.4 Connecting the CHG-120

Figure 171 shows how to connect four 55 AH batteries to the charger:

JP2

AC Power In

J3

AFP-200

AC Power In

TB1

TB2

Charger

–

+

–

TB2

+

–

+

F1 F2 F3

!

Warning:

Do not connect the

Battery

Interconnect Cable

at this time.

–

Battery Interconnect Cable

+

–

+

55 AH/

60 AH

(12 V)

55 AH/

60 AH

(12 V)

–

Battery Interconnect Cable

+

–

+

55 AH/

60 AH

(12 V)

55 AH/

60 AH

(12 V)

AFP2-CHG

Figure 171 Connecting the CHG-120 to the AFP-200

N.4.1 Connecting a CHG-120 to the AFP-200

Connect CHG-120 (tied to four batteries) to the AFP-200 as follows:

1. Remove all power sources to the charger.

2. Tie the batteries in pairs by connecting the battery negative terminals and the battery positive terminals as shown in Figure 171.

3. Connect the battery negative cable to the TB2 terminal (on the charger labeled

“Battery –”) as shown in Figure 171.

4. Connect the battery positive cable to the TB2 terminal (on the charger) labeled

“Battery +”) as shown in Figure 171.

5. Proceed to the section “Connecting the Charger.”

Do not connect the Battery

Interconnect Cable at this time

—refer to the CHG-120 manual, part number

50641 for more detail.

194


AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002

Limited Warranty

NOTIFIER®

warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture, under normal use and service. Products are date stamped at time of manufacture. The sole and exclusive obligation of

NOTIFIER®

is to repair or replace, at its option, free of charge for parts and labor, any part which is defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. For products not under

NOTIFIER®

manufacturing date-stamp control, the warranty is eighteen (18) months from date of original purchase by

NOTIFIER®

’s distributor unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. This warranty is void if the product is altered, repaired or serviced by anyone other than

NOTIFIER®

or its authorized distributors or if there is a failure to maintain the products and systems in which they operate in a proper and workable manner.

In case of defect, secure a Return Material Authorization form from our customer service department. Return product, transportation prepaid, to

NOTIFIER®

, 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut

06472-1653.

This writing constitutes the only warranty made by

NOTIFIER®

with respect to its products.

NOTIFIER®

does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise, or that its products will in all cases provide the protection for which they are installed or intended. Buyer acknowledges that

NOTIFIER®

is not an insurer and assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience, transportation, damage, misuse, abuse, accident or similar incident.

NOTIFIER®

GIVES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION

ON THE FACE HEREOF. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL

NOTIFIER®

BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO

PROPERTY, DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING

OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE

NOTIFIER®

PROD-

UCTS. FURTHERMORE,

NOTIFIER®

SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE

COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR

INDUSTRIAL USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.

This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by

NOTIFIER®

. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized.

"

NOTIFIER

" is a registered trademark.

AFP-200 PN 15511:H2 10/14/2002


195

World Headquarters

12 Clintonville Road

Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA

203-484-7161 fax 203-484-7118 www.notifier.com

NOTIFIER is a


company.